JP2021154158A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing occurrence of a failure of a flat cable.SOLUTION: A Pachinko game machine 1 comprises: a board 1720 on which an LED is mounted; a connector 1760 being coupled to the LED and being provided on the board 1720; and a flat cable 1770 coupled to the connector 1760. The Pachinko game machine has a guide part 1714 which can be brought into contact with a part of the flat cable 1770, a part where the flat cable 1770 is inserted into the connector 1760 can be visually recognized from a back side of a movable body 1620, and the guide part 1714 can regulate movement of the flat cable 1770 in a prescribed direction. The board 1720 has a standard line 1722 which is substantially parallel to a prescribed part of the flat cable 1770 when the flat cable 1770 is correctly coupled to the connector 1760, and the standard line 1722 is printed on the board 1720 so that the line is larger than the prescribed part in a prescribed direction.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 76

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine technique.

Conventionally, the technology of gaming machines has become known.

In pachinko machines (game machines), a technique has been proposed in which a flat cable is sandwiched between wiring guides so that the flat cable cannot be easily pulled out from the connector (see Patent Document 1). Specifically, the wiring guide sandwiches the flat surface portion of the flat cable with other members. As a result, the wiring guide can regulate the movement and bending of the flat cable in the direction perpendicular to the flat surface portion, and thus the flat cable can be prevented from being easily pulled out from the connector.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-104294

However, the above-mentioned conventional pachinko machine can regulate the movement of the flat cable in the direction perpendicular to the flat surface portion, but restricts the movement of the flat cable in the direction parallel to the flat surface portion (for example, the width direction of the flat cable). It's not a thing. Therefore, the flat cable may be inserted at an angle to the connector. If the flat cable is inserted diagonally to the connector, it is disadvantageous in that problems such as short circuit and malfunction may occur.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and the problem to be solved is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the occurrence of defects in the flat cable.

The problem to be solved by the present invention is as described above, and next, the means for solving this problem will be described.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a specific member, a substrate provided on the specific member on which an electronic component is mounted, a connector provided on the substrate and connected to the electronic component, and a flat cable connected to the connector. A gaming machine equipped with a guide portion capable of contacting a part of the flat cable, so that the portion where the flat cable is inserted into the connector can be visually recognized from the back side of the specific member. The flat cable is provided with a power supply line capable of conducting power, an insulating portion arranged so as to cover the power supply line, and a reinforcing sheet capable of reinforcing at least a part of the insulating portion. The guide portion can restrict the movement of the flat cable in a predetermined direction, and the guide portion is abbreviated as a predetermined portion of the flat cable when the flat cable is accurately connected to the connector on the substrate. A parallel reference portion is provided, and the reference portion is printed on the substrate so as to be larger than the predetermined portion in a predetermined direction.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects in the flat cable.

The perspective view which shows the appearance in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. Similarly, an exploded perspective view showing the appearance. Similarly, a front view showing the appearance of the game board. Similarly, the front view which shows the LED unit including the 1st and 2nd special symbol display part. Similarly, a block diagram showing a main control circuit. Similarly, (a) a table showing the specifications of the special symbol game. (B) A table showing the specifications of a normal design game. (C) A table showing the distribution per hit. (D) A table showing the types of hits. Similarly, a flowchart showing the flow of the game. The flowchart which shows the continuation of FIG. Similarly, a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a system timer interrupt process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a special symbol control process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a special symbol memory check process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a special symbol determination process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a special symbol fluctuation time management process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a special symbol display time management process executed by the main control circuit. The flowchart which shows the continuation of FIG. Similarly, a flowchart showing a hit start interval management process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing the large winning opening reopening waiting time management process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a large winning opening opening process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a hit end interval process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a special symbol game end process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the sub control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the sub control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the sub control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a command analysis process executed by the sub control circuit. The flowchart which shows the continuation of FIG. A front perspective view showing an ordinary electric accessory unit. A front exploded perspective view showing an ordinary electric accessory unit. Front view of the base member of the ordinary electric accessory unit. Front perspective view of the base member of the ordinary electric accessory unit. Front sectional view of an ordinary electric accessory unit. Front sectional perspective view of the ordinary electric accessory unit. Front perspective view showing the attacker unit. Front view showing the attacker unit. A side view showing an attacker unit. Top view showing the attacker unit. Front exploded perspective view showing the attacker unit. The front view which shows the base member of an attacker unit. The rear view which shows the front side plate part of an attacker unit. Front sectional view showing an attacker unit. Front sectional perspective view of the attacker unit. (A) A plan view showing a large winning opening solenoid. (B) Top view showing the link arm. (C) A plan view showing a shutter. (A) A plan view showing an attacker unit when the shutter is in the second position. (B) Similarly, a plan view showing a special electric accessory. (A) A plan view showing an attacker unit when the shutter is in the first position. (B) Similarly, a plan view showing a special electric accessory. (A) A schematic plan view showing how a game ball rolls on the first taxiway of an attacker unit. (B) Similarly, a schematic plan view showing a continuation of FIG. 45 (a). (C) Similarly, a schematic plan view showing how a plurality of game balls roll. A front sectional view showing a mutual positional relationship between an ordinary electric accessory and an attacker unit. A partial front view showing a game ball rolling in a game area. (A) A front sectional view showing how a game ball rolls on an ordinary electric accessory unit. (B) Similarly, a front sectional view showing a continuation of FIG. 48 (a). A partial front view showing a game ball rolling in a game area. (A) A front sectional view showing how a game ball rolls on an attacker unit. (B) Similarly, a front sectional view showing a continuation of FIG. 50 (a). (A) A front sectional view showing how a game ball rolls on an attacker unit. (B) Similarly, a front sectional view showing a continuation of FIG. 51 (a). (A) A schematic plan view showing how a game ball rolls on the first taxiway of the attacker unit according to another example. (B) Similarly, a schematic side view. (A) A schematic plan view showing a continuation of FIG. 52 (a). (B) Similarly, a schematic side view. The front view which shows the 2nd movable accessory unit. The front view which shows the state which the 1st movable body (excluding the base member) is removed from the 2nd movable accessory unit. The front view which shows the state which the 1st movable body was removed from the 2nd movable accessory unit. The rear view which shows the 2nd movable accessory unit. The plan view which shows the 2nd movable accessory unit. A rear perspective view showing a second movable accessory unit. The rear view which shows the 1st movable body (excluding the base member). A forward exploded perspective view showing a movable body of the first movable body. The rear view which shows the movement control means of the 1st movable body. A rear view showing how the movable body is moved from the standby position to the production position. The rear view which shows the 1st movable body (excluding a base member) in a state where a movable body is in an effect position. A forward exploded perspective view showing the second movable body. The front view which shows the movement control means. The front view which showed the state of moving the 1st movable body and the 2nd movable body from a standby position to an effect position. The front view which showed the state which the 1st movable body (base member only) and the 2nd movable body are in the production position. The front view which showed the state which the 1st movable body and the 2nd movable body are in the production position. The rear view which showed the state which the 1st movable body and the 2nd movable body are in the production position. The plan view which showed the state which the 1st movable body and the 2nd movable body are in the production position. The front schematic view which showed the state of the arm in the state which the 1st movable body is in a standby position. The front schematic view which showed the state of the arm in the state which the 1st movable body is in the highest position. The front schematic view which showed the state of the arm in the state which the 1st movable body is in a production position. The front view which showed the inside (base member and substrate) of the 2nd movable body. Enlarged front view showing the connector and flat cable of the second movable body. An exploded perspective cross-sectional view (SS cross section of FIG. 75) showing a butt portion of the second movable body. Similarly, a side sectional view (SS cross section of FIG. 75). The side sectional view which showed the detailed shape of the butt part of the 2nd movable body. (A) A plan view showing the configuration of a flat cable. (B) Similarly, a side view. (C) Similarly, a bottom view. A front view showing a state in which the flat cable is normally connected. Front view showing the state where the flat cable is not connected normally. (A) A side sectional view showing a first deformation example of a butt portion of a second movable body. (B) Similarly, a side sectional view showing a second modification. (C) Similarly, a side sectional view showing a third modification. The front view which showed the inside (base member and substrate) of a movable body. Rear view showing the substrate, connector and flat cable of the movable body. The rear view which showed the base member to which the substrate was attached. The rear view which showed the modification of the 2nd movable body. The perspective view which showed the effect device which concerns on 1st Embodiment of the 1st movable accessory unit. Similarly, a front sectional view. Similarly, an exploded perspective view. A perspective view of the drum body. Similarly, the right front disassembled perspective view. Similarly, the left front disassembled perspective view. Right side view of the base member. Left side view of the reel seat. Right side view showing a base member and a reel seat. A1-A1 cross-sectional view. Right front disassembled perspective view showing the effect device according to the modified example. Similarly, a right side view showing a base member, a reel seat, and a left side mounting member. B1-B1 cross-sectional view. The perspective view which showed the effect device which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of the 1st movable accessory unit. Similarly, a front sectional view. Similarly, an exploded perspective view. A perspective view of the drum body. Similarly, the right front disassembled perspective view. Similarly, the left front disassembled perspective view. Right side view of the base member. Left side view of the reel seat. Right side view showing a base member and a reel seat. A2-A2 sectional view. Right front disassembled perspective view showing the effect device according to the modified example. Similarly, a right side view showing a base member, a reel seat, and a left side mounting member. B2-B2 sectional view. The perspective view which showed the effect device which concerns on the 3rd Embodiment of the 1st movable accessory unit. Similarly, a front sectional view. Similarly, an exploded perspective view. A perspective view of the drum body. Similarly, the right front disassembled perspective view. Similarly, the left front disassembled perspective view. Right side view of the base member. Left side view of the reel seat. Right side view showing a base member, a reel seat and a left side mounting member. A3-A3 sectional view. B3-B3 sectional view. (A) Right side view showing a superposed portion that is not pressed by the pressing portion. (B) Right side view showing a deformed state of the overlapped portion. Right front perspective view showing a game ball distribution device. Similarly, the right front disassembled perspective view. Similarly, a right rear exploded perspective view. A rear perspective view showing a base member, a rotary distribution mechanism, a crune, and a guide member. A forward disassembled perspective view showing a guide member and a holding member. The figure which showed the state which the game ball is distributed to the 2nd passage. The figure which showed the flow of the game ball distributed to the 2nd passage, the 3rd passage and the 4th passage. The figure which showed the state which the game ball is distributed to the 1st passage. A front perspective view showing a game ball distribution device. The plan view which showed the game ball distribution apparatus which concerns on another embodiment.

[Composition of gaming machines]
First, an overview of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 5.
In the following description, the front-rear direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is defined with the front side as the front side and the back side as the rear side when viewed from the player. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player, the left-hand side is the left side and the right-hand side is the right side, and the left-right direction is defined.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a wooden frame 11, a base door 12, a glass door 13, a plate unit 14, a launching device 15, a liquid crystal display device 16, a game board 17, a payout unit 18, and a substrate. The unit 19 is provided.

The wooden frame 11 is a frame body having a substantially rectangular shape in front view. The wooden frame 11 is provided with an opening 21 that penetrates in the front-rear direction. The base door 12 is fitted into the opening 21 of the wooden frame 11. The base door 12 supports various members. Specifically, the base door 12 supports the payout unit 18 and the substrate unit 19 on the back surface side, and also has the glass door 13, the plate unit 14, the launching device 15, the liquid crystal display device 16, and the game board 17 on the front surface side. To support.

The glass door 13 is pivotally attached to the base door 12 so as to be openable and closable. The glass door 13 is provided with an opening 22. A transparent protective glass 23 is arranged in the opening 22 of the glass door 13. The protective glass 23 is arranged so as to face the game board 17 described later in the front-rear direction in a state where the glass door 13 is closed with respect to the base door 12. Further, a speaker 24 and a lamp 25 are arranged on the upper part of the glass door 13. The speaker 24 is, for example, a voice notification, an effect, an error notification, and the like. The lamp 25 is used for, for example, announcing with light, producing an effect, or the like.

The plate unit 14 is a unit body in which the upper plate 26 and the lower plate 27 are integrated. The dish unit 14 is a lower front portion of the base door 12 and is arranged below the glass door 13.

The upper plate 26 is for storing a game ball to be fired in the game area 20, which will be described later. The upper plate 26 is provided with a payout port 61 and an effect button 62. The payout outlet 61 is for lending and paying out (prize balls) game balls. The payout outlet 61 discharges the game ball when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied. The effect button 62 is a so-called "CHANGE button", a "push button", or the like. The effect button 62 is operated by the player.

The lower plate 27 is mainly for storing the game balls overflowing from the upper plate 26. The lower plate 27 is provided with a payout port 63. The payout port 63 is for lending and paying out (prize balls) game balls, similarly to the payout port 63 of the upper plate 26. The payout port 63 discharges the game ball when the game ball overflows from the upper plate 26.

The launching device 15 is for launching the game ball stored in the upper plate 26 into the game area 20. The launcher 15 is located in the lower right front of the base door 12 and is located in the lower right of the dish unit 14. The launching device 15 includes a panel body 31, a driving device (not shown), and a launching handle 32.

The panel body 31 is integrated with the lower right portion of the dish unit 14 in the launching device 15. The firing handle 32 is arranged on the surface side of the panel body 31. The drive device is arranged on the back surface side of the panel body 31, and is composed of, for example, a firing solenoid. In this way, when the launching handle 32 is operated by the player in the launching device 15, the game ball is launched by the operation of the driving device in response to the operation.

The liquid crystal display device 16 displays the result of the hit determination and various images related to the game. The various images include, for example, an identification symbol (decorative symbol) for effect, an effect image during a big hit, a demo effect image, a number of hold times for variable display of the identification symbol, and the like. The liquid crystal display device 16 (more specifically, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) is arranged substantially at the center of the game board 17 (on the inner peripheral side of the stage 42 described later).

The game board 17 is arranged in front of the base door 12 so as to be located behind the protective glass 23. On the front surface of the game board 17, a game area 20 in which the launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed. As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 17 includes a guide rail 41, a stage 42, a game ball distribution device 5400 (first starting port 5442), and a normal electric accessory unit 400 (second starting port 440 and an ordinary electric accessory). 460), passage gate 49, attacker unit 500 (large winning opening 540 and special electric accessory 600), general winning opening 53, 54, 450, out opening 55, LED unit 70, decorative member 56, movable accessory unit 57. Equipped.

The guide rail 41 is composed of two rail-shaped members (hereinafter, referred to as "outer rail 41a" and "inner rail 41b"). The outer rail 41a mainly partitions (defines) the game area 20. The outer rail 41a is arranged so as to surround the game area 20. The inner rail 41b, together with the outer rail 41a, is for guiding the launched game ball to the upper part of the game area 20. The inner rail 41b is arranged inside the outer rail 41a on the left side of the game board 17.

The stage 42 divides the flow-down area of the game ball in the game area 20 into the left and right sides of the stage 42. The stage 42 is arranged above the game area 20. The stage 42 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front. A game board 17 is opened on the inside (inner peripheral side) of the stage 42, and a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is formed.

The game ball launched by the launching device 15 flows down toward the lower side of the game board 17 while changing the traveling direction due to a collision with the stage 42, the game nail 68 driven into the game board 17. The flow-down area of the launched game ball is distributed according to the amount of operation of the launch handle 32. Specifically, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 32 is small, the launched game ball flows down the left side of the stage 42. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 32 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right side of the stage 42. The method of hitting the game ball on the left side of the stage 42 is called "left-handed hitting", and the method of hitting the game ball on the right side of the stage 42 is called "right-handed hitting".

The game ball distribution device 5400 is a device that appropriately distributes the game balls to the first start port 5442 or the out ports 5443 and 5444. The game ball distribution device 5400 is arranged at a substantially central lower portion of the game area 20.

The first starting port 5442 gives an opportunity for a hit determination on the condition that the game ball wins (passes), and the result of the hit determination is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol, which will be described later. It gives an opportunity to be displayed on the display unit 74. A first start port switch 5472 is arranged at the first start port 5442 (see FIG. 5). When a game ball wins the first starting port 5442, the winning game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 5472. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 5472, a hit determination is made inside the pachinko game machine 1 (the board unit 19 shown in FIG. 2), and a preset number of game balls are discharged to the payout port 61. Alternatively, it is paid out (discharged) from the payout port 63 to the upper plate 26 or the lower plate 27. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 is performed by left-handed striking.
A detailed description of the configuration of the game ball distribution device 5400 will be described later.

The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body in which the second starting port 440 and the ordinary electric accessory 460 are integrated. The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged at a substantially right lower portion of the game area 20.

The second starting port 440 gives an opportunity for a hit determination on the condition that the game ball wins (passes), and displays the result of the hit determination on the liquid crystal display device 16, the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol, which will be described later. It gives an opportunity to be displayed on the display unit 74. A second start port switch 441 is arranged at the second start port 440 (see FIG. 5). When a game ball wins in the second starting port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441, a hit determination is made inside the pachinko game machine 1 (the board unit 19 shown in FIG. 2), and a preset number of game balls are discharged to the payout port 61. Alternatively, it is paid out (discharged) from the payout port 63 to the upper plate 26 or the lower plate 27. The difficulty of winning the second starting port 440 is determined by the ordinary electric accessory 460. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is performed by right-handed striking.

The ordinary electric accessory 460 includes a blade member 461 that can rotate in the left-right direction, and a start port solenoid 462 (see FIG. 5) that drives the blade member 461. The ordinary electric accessory 460 is arranged above the second starting port 440. The ordinary electric accessory 460 can shift (drive) between an open state in which the game ball can easily pass and a closed state in which the game ball cannot easily pass by driving the blade member 461 by the start port solenoid 462. It is composed of. When the game ball passes through the blade member 461 in the ordinary electric accessory 460, the game ball is awarded to the second starting port 440. The opening / closing drive by the ordinary electric accessory 460 (blade member 461) is performed for a predetermined period and number of times when the ordinary symbol has a specific stop display mode on the ordinary symbol display unit 71.

The passing gate 49 provides an opportunity for determining a normal symbol on the condition that the game ball wins (passes). The passage gate 49 is a central right portion of the game board 17, and is arranged above the ordinary electric accessory unit 400. A passing gate switch 49a is provided at the passing gate 49 (see FIG. 5). When the game ball passes through the passing gate 49, the passing game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 49a. When a game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 49a, a normal symbol determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the board unit 19 shown in FIG. 2). The passing of the game ball through the passing gate 49 is performed by right-handed striking.

The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which a large winning opening 540 and a special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is located at a substantially lower right portion of the game area 20 and below the normal electric accessory unit 400.

The large winning opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of a hit game state (large hit game state or small hit game state), which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is arranged in the large winning opening 540 (see FIG. 5). When a game ball wins in the large winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out (discharged) from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout outlet 63 to the lower plate 27).

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move forward and backward, and a large winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 5) that drives the shutter 610. The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the large winning opening 540. The special electric accessory 600 is in an open state in which the shutter 610 is driven by the large winning opening solenoid 620 to enable (or easily) win a game ball in the large winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 is in an open state. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. In the open drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610), the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74, and the hit game state (big hit game state or It is performed when the mode is changed to the small hit game state).

The general winning openings 53 and 54 are arranged at the lower left of the game board 17 in a state of being separated from each other. Further, the general winning opening 450 is provided in the ordinary electric accessory unit 400. General winning opening switches 53a, 54a, and 451 are arranged at the general winning openings 53, 54, and 450 (see FIG. 5). When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 53, 54, 450, the winning game ball is detected by the general winning opening switch 53a, 54a, 451. When a game ball is detected by the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, and 451 a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout outlet 63 to the lower plate 27) (discharge). Will be).

In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls in the first starting port 5442 and the second starting port 440 is 3, the number of prize balls in the general winning openings 53, 54, 450 is 10, and the number of prize balls in the large winning opening 540. The number is set to 15 respectively. This value (number of prize balls) can be arbitrarily changed in design.

The out port 55 is arranged at the lowermost center of the game board 17. The out port 55 is finally flowed in when the launched game ball does not win a prize in each winning (starting) opening such as the first starting port 5442.

The LED unit 70 is located at the lower right of the game board 17 and is arranged outside the guide rail 41. The LED unit 70 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated. Specifically, the LED unit 70 has, as the various display units, a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol hold display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, and a first special. It includes a symbol hold display unit 75 and a second special symbol hold display unit 76.

The ordinary symbol display unit 71 displays the result of determination (ordinary symbol determination) for the ordinary symbol game. Here, the ordinary symbol game refers to a game in which it is determined whether or not to drive the ordinary electric accessory 460 to open the state based on the result of the determination (ordinary symbol determination). The ordinary symbol display unit 71 includes display LEDs 71a and 71b. When the predetermined variation display start condition is satisfied, the display LEDs 71a and 71b start the variation display that alternately turns on and off. The combination (display pattern) of the display LEDs 71a and 71b by turning on and off is displayed as a normal symbol. The display LEDs 71a and 71b perform a stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the determination (normal symbol determination) is correct, the combination of turning on / off the display LEDs 71a / 71b (special symbol) is the specific stop display mode. In this way, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined that the normal electric accessory 460 is in the open state, the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the second starting port is opened. The difficulty of winning a game ball to 440 is changed.

The hold display unit 72 for a normal symbol displays the number of times of execution of the variable display of the held normal symbol (hereinafter, referred to as "the number of times of holding the variable display of the normal symbol"). The hold display unit 72 for a normal symbol includes display LEDs 72a and 72b. The hold display unit 72 for a normal symbol displays the number of hold times of the variable display of the normal symbol by the combination of turning on and off the display LEDs 72a and 72b. For example, when the execution of the variation display of the normal symbol is suspended for one time, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned off. Further, when the execution of the variation display of the normal symbol is suspended for two times, the display LED 72a is lit and the display LED 72b is lit. Further, when the execution of the variation display of the normal symbol is suspended for three times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b lights up. Further, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended for four times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b blinks.

The first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 display the result of determination (hit determination) for the special symbol game. Here, the special symbol game refers to a game in which the transition or maintenance of the gaming state is determined based on the result of the determination (hit determination).

The first special symbol display unit 73 includes a display LED group 73a composed of eight LEDs. The display LED group 73a displays the variation with the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 (starting winning), and displays the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball. When the predetermined variation display start condition is satisfied, the display LED group 73a starts the variation display in which the eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 73a, the combination (display pattern) of turning on / off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 73a performs a stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 is a hit, the combination of turning on / off the eight LEDs of the display LED group 73a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. .. In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the game ball can be won in the large winning opening 540. Become. In the following description, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 is referred to as the first special symbol.

The second special symbol display unit 74 includes a display LED group 74a composed of eight LEDs. The display LED group 74a displays the variation with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (starting winning), and displays the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball. When the predetermined variation display start condition is satisfied, the display LED group 74a starts the variation display in which the eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 74a, the combination (display pattern) by turning on / off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 74a performs a stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is a hit, the combination of turning on / off the eight LEDs of the display LED group 74a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. .. In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the game ball can be won in the large winning opening 540. Become. In the following description, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display unit 74 based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is referred to as the second special symbol.

In this way, when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode in the display LED groups 73a and 74a of the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, it is normal. The transition from the gaming state (normal gaming state) to the hit gaming state, which is a state advantageous to the player, is determined. In the present embodiment, the hit determination includes a big hit determination and a small hit determination. That is, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state as a hit gaming state. Further, when the result of the hit determination is a small hit, the gaming state is shifted to the small hit gaming state as the hit gaming state. As described above, in the present embodiment, two types of hit game states are provided as the game states that shift from the normal game state.

The first special symbol hold display unit 75 and the second special symbol hold display unit 76 determine the number of times the reserved special symbol variable display is executed (hereinafter, referred to as "the number of times the special symbol variable display is held"). It is to be displayed. The hold display unit 75 for the first special symbol includes display LEDs 75a and 75b. The second special symbol hold display unit 76 includes display LEDs 76a and 76b. The first special symbol hold display unit 75 and the second special symbol hold display unit 76 display the number of hold times of the variable display of the special symbol by turning on / off the display LEDs 75a / 75b and 76a / 76b. The display modes of turning on / off the display LEDs 75a / 75b and 76a / 76b are the same as those of the display LEDs 72a / 72b of the normal symbol hold display unit 72.

The decorative member 56 is a member that decorates the game board 17. The decorative member 56 is the upper part of the game board 17 and is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the stage 42. The decorative member 56 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape with the longitudinal direction in the left-right direction. The surface side (player side) of the decorative member 56 is decorated to imitate a logo (character), a character, a symbol, or the like. The decorative member 56 is configured to be capable of emitting light by an LED (not shown) or the like.

The movable accessory unit 57 is a unit body in which a movable accessory, a drive source, and the like, which will be described later, are integrated. The movable accessory unit 57 can perform a predetermined effect operation using the movable accessory to enhance the interest of the player. In the present embodiment, the movable accessory unit 57 includes a first movable accessory unit (effect device 2400), a second movable accessory unit 82, and a third movable accessory unit 83.

The first movable accessory unit (effect device 2400) is located in the upper right portion of the game board 17 and is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the stage 42.
A detailed description of the configuration of the first movable accessory unit (effect device 2400) will be described later.

The second movable accessory unit 82 is located above the game board 17 and behind the decorative member 56.
A detailed description of the configuration of the second movable accessory unit 82 will be described later.

The third movable accessory unit 83 is a right portion and a left portion of the game board 17, and is arranged behind the stage 42, respectively. The third movable accessory unit 83 includes a hand accessory 86 (third movable accessory) that imitates a human hand. The hand accessory 86 is configured to be movable. Further, the hand accessory 86 is configured to be lit. In the standby state (state in which the effect operation is not performed) as shown in FIG. 3, most of the hand accessory 86 is concealed behind the game board 17 and the stage 42, making it difficult for the player to see. In addition, most of the hand accessory 86 is exposed in front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the operating state (state in which the effect is being produced), so that the player can easily see the hand accessory 86.

Hereinafter, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, the outline of the internal processing when the game ball wins the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440 will be described.

When the game ball wins the first starting port 5442, the winning game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 5472, and the first special symbol display unit 73 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. In addition, when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 5442 during the variable display of the first special symbol, the game is played in the first starting port 5442 until the first special symbol in the variable display is stopped and displayed. The execution (start) of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the winning of the ball is suspended. After that, when the first special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the suspended display of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started.

When the game ball wins the second starting port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441, and the second special symbol display unit 74 starts the variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 440 during the variable display of the second special symbol, the game is played in the second starting port 440 until the second special symbol in the variable display is stopped and displayed. The execution (start) of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the winning of the ball is suspended. After that, when the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the suspended display of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started.

In the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, the special symbols (first and second special symbols) do not change at the same time. That is, while one display unit of the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 is performing the variable display of the special symbol, the other display unit is not performing the variable display of the special symbol. .. In the present embodiment, when the execution of the variable display of the first and second special symbols is suspended, the start winning prize to the second starting port 440 is prioritized, and the variable display of the second special symbol is performed.

In addition, an upper limit is set for the number of times of holding the variable display of the first and second special symbols. In the present embodiment, the number of times of holding the variable display of the first and second special symbols is set up to 4 times each. Therefore, the maximum number of holdings for the variable display of the special symbol is eight, which is the total number of holdings for the variable display of the special symbol due to the winning of the first starting port 5442 and the second starting port 440.

Further, during the change of the first or second special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, the identification symbol consisting of numbers changes in the liquid crystal display device 16 except in a specific case. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, symbols from "1" to "8" are used as the numbers. Further, as for the identification symbol that is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the first or second special symbol that is being variablely displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 is stopped and displayed, and is stopped. Is displayed. The identification symbol is also used as identification information for the effect.

Further, when the first or second special symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 is in a specific stop display mode, the player is notified that it is a hit. The effect image to be produced is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In this embodiment, as will be described later, a plurality of types of hits are provided. In addition, when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the specific stop display mode is set according to the type of hit. In such a configuration, the combination of the identification symbols that are stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is a specific display that can be recognized by the player according to the specific stop display mode of the first or second special symbol. It becomes an aspect. As a result, the player can recognize the type of the hit in addition to the hit. It should be noted that some of the types of hits are in a specific display mode that makes it difficult for the player to recognize, depending on the specific stop display mode of the first or second special symbol. According to this, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that it is a hit and the type of the hit.

[Electrical configuration of gaming machines]
Hereinafter, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mainly composed of a main control circuit 100 that controls the game and a sub control circuit 200 that controls the effect according to the progress of the game.

The main control circuit 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (read-only memory), a main RAM 103 (read / write memory), and the like.

A main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, and the like are connected to the main CPU 101. The main CPU 101 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 102.

The main ROM 102 stores a program for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 101, various tables, and the like.

The main RAM 103 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101. In the present embodiment, the main RAM 103 is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 101, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read or written may be used.

The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area in which information on the special symbol game is stored as start-up memory. Specifically, in the main RAM 103, the first special symbol start storage area (0) in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the fluctuating first special symbol is stored as the start memory, and the first for the upper limit of four times. The first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the special symbol is stored as the start memory, are provided. Similarly, in the main RAM 103, the second special symbol start storage area (0) in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is stored as the start memory, and the second special for the upper limit of 4 times are stored. The second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the symbol is stored as the start memory, are provided.

Further, the main control circuit 100 includes an initial reset circuit 104 that generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, an I / O port 105, a command output port 106, a backup capacitor 107, and the like. The initial reset circuit 104 is connected to the main CPU 101. The I / O port 105 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 101, and transmits output signals from the main CPU 101 to various devices. The command output port 106 transmits a command from the main CPU 101 to the sub control circuit 200. The backup capacitor 107 holds various data stored in the main RAM 103 by promptly supplying power to the main RAM 103, for example, when the power is cut off.

Further, various devices (members) are connected to the main control circuit 100.

For example, the main control circuit 100 includes a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol hold display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, and a first special symbol hold display unit 75. The second special symbol hold display unit 76, the start port solenoid 462 that drives the blade member 461 of the ordinary electric accessory 460, the large winning opening solenoid 620 that drives the shutter 610, and the like are connected. The main control circuit 100 can control the operation of these devices (members) by transmitting signals. Further, the main control circuit 100 is used to transmit data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of hits, and the like, and a hall computer that manages pachinko gaming machines in the entire hall. The external terminal plate 320 is connected.

Further, the first start port switch 5472, the second start port switch 441, the passing gate switch 49a, the count switch 541, the general winning port switches 53a, 54a, 451 and the like are connected to the main control circuit 100. When a game ball is detected by these members, a predetermined detection signal is supplied to the main control circuit 100 from the members. Further, the main control circuit 100 is connected to a backup clear switch 330 or the like that clears the backup data at the time of power failure according to the operation of the manager of the amusement park.

Further, a payout / launch control circuit 300 is connected to the main control circuit 100. The payout / launch control circuit 300 is connected to a payout device 340 for paying out game balls, a launcher 350 for firing game balls, a card unit 360, and the like. A ball lending operation panel 370 is connected to the card unit 360, and a signal corresponding to the player's operation is supplied to the ball lending operation panel 370.

When the payout / launch control circuit 300 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 100 and the rental ball control signal supplied from the card unit 360, the payout / launch control circuit 300 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 340. Control is performed so that the payout device 340 pays out the game ball. Further, in the payout / launch control circuit 300, when the launch handle 32 is gripped by the player and is rotated in the clockwise direction, electric power is applied to the launch solenoid according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). It supplies and controls the launch of the game ball.

Further, a sub control circuit 200 is connected to the command output port 106. The sub control circuit 200 performs display control on the liquid crystal display device 16, control on sound generated from the speaker 24, control on light of the lamp 25, and the like in response to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 100 supplies a command to the sub control circuit 200, while the sub control circuit 200 cannot supply a signal to the main control circuit 100. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured so that a signal can be transmitted from the control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100.

The sub control circuit 200 includes a sub CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203, a display control circuit 204, a voice control circuit 205, a lamp control circuit 206, an accessory control circuit 207, and the like. The sub control circuit 200 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 100. Further, the sub control circuit 200 is connected to an effect button switch 310 that is turned on / off by operating the effect button 62.

The sub CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 202. In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the sub control circuit 200 according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

The program ROM 202 stores a program for controlling the gaming effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201, various tables, and the like.

In the present embodiment, the main ROM 102 and the program ROM 202 are configured to be used as storage means for storing programs, tables, and the like, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a storage medium readable by a computer provided with control means is used. If it is, it may be another aspect. For example, as the storage means, a hard disk device or a storage medium such as a CD-ROM, a DVD-ROM, or a ROM cartridge may be used. Further, the program, the table, or the like may not be recorded in advance, but may be downloaded after the power is turned on and recorded in the work RAM 203 or the like. Further, the programs, tables, and the like may be recorded on different storage media.

The work RAM 203 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201. In the present embodiment, the work RAM 203 is used as the temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read or written may be used.

The display control circuit 204 is a circuit for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 16. The display control circuit 204 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM in which data for generating various image data is stored, a frame buffer for buffering the image data, and an image signal for the image data. It is provided with a D / A converter or the like that converts as.

The display control circuit 204 can perform various processes for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 16 according to the data supplied from the sub CPU 201. The display control circuit 204 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the frame buffer in response to the image display command supplied from the sub CPU 201. The image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 includes various image data related to the game, such as identification symbol image data indicating the identification symbol, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 204 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the liquid crystal display device 16 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the liquid crystal display device 16, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In this way, the display control circuit 204 can control the liquid crystal display device 16 to display an image related to the game.

The voice control circuit 205 is a circuit for controlling the sound generated from the speaker 24. The audio control circuit 205 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier for amplifying an audio signal (hereinafter, referred to as AMP), and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 24. The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM in response to the voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Further, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies the audio signal and generates audio from the speaker 24.

The lamp control circuit 206 is a circuit for controlling the lamp 25 including the decorative lamp and the like. The lamp control circuit 206 includes a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decorative data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp decorative patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 207 is for controlling the movable accessory unit 57 (the first movable accessory unit (effect device 2400), the second movable accessory unit 82, and the third movable accessory unit 83). It is a circuit. The accessory control circuit 207 is a accessory that stores a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to the movable accessory unit 57, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, an operation pattern, and a lighting pattern. It has a data ROM and the like.

Further, the drive circuit selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to the accessory operation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Then, the selected operation pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the mechanical operation of the movable accessory unit 57 is controlled by supplying the drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on the lighting command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the lighting operation of the movable accessory unit 57 is controlled by supplying the lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

[basic specifications]
Hereinafter, the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 6 is a table showing the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, FIG. 6A is a table showing the specifications of the special symbol game. Further, FIG. 6B is a table showing the specifications of the ordinary symbol game. Further, FIG. 6 (c) is a table showing the distribution of hits. Further, FIG. 6D is a table showing the types of hits. The data in the table shown in FIGS. 6A to 6D is stored as a table in the main ROM 102.

In the special symbol game, the jackpot determination is performed in a low probability state or a high probability state. In this way, in the special symbol game, the gaming state in which the jackpot determination is performed in the low probability state is simply referred to as the low probability state (or the normal state or the non-probability change state). Further, in the special symbol game, the gaming state in which the jackpot determination is performed in the high probability state is simply referred to as the high probability state (or the probability variation state). In this way, when the gaming state becomes the probabilistic state, the player is given a state more advantageous than the normal state.

Further, in the normal symbol game, the normal symbol determination is performed in a high probability state. Further, when the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit, the normal electric accessory 460 is opened (normal hit game) for a relatively long time. As described above, in the normal symbol game, the game state in which the normal symbol determination is performed in a high probability state and the normal electric accessory 460 is opened for a relatively long time is referred to as an electric support state. In the electric support state, the time per normal symbol determination is shorter than that in the non-electric support state. Such a state in which the electric support state is performed and the time per normal symbol determination is performed in a short time is referred to as a time saving state. It should be noted that the high-probability state of the normal symbol determination is configured to be able to shift when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot or the like. Further, the high probability state of the normal symbol determination ends when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, for example, when the time saving state ends.

In the normal symbol game, the normal symbol determination is not performed in the game state other than the time saving state. Such a gaming state (a gaming state other than the time saving state) in which the normal symbol determination is not performed is referred to as a normal state (or a non-time saving state). In this way, when the gaming state becomes the time saving state, the player is given a state more advantageous than the non-time saving state. The time saving state is continued until, for example, the hit determination (big hit determination and small hit determination) in the special symbol game is performed a predetermined number of times after the transition from the normal state.

As described above, the normal state indicates a game state in which the jackpot determination is performed in a low probability state in the special symbol game, and the normal symbol determination is not performed in the normal symbol game.

First, the specifications of the special symbol game will be described with reference to FIG. 6A.

As shown in FIG. 6A, in the special symbol game, the probability that the result of the jackpot determination in the low probability state (normal state) will be a jackpot (hereinafter referred to as the jackpot probability) is the first starting port 5442 and the second. In any case of the starting prize of the starting port 440, it is commonly set to 1/200 (one coefficient for 200 random values). Further, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (probability change state) is 1/100 (for 200 random values) in common regardless of the starting prize of either the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440. 2 coefficients). In addition, the probability that the result of the small hit determination will be a hit due to the start winning of the second starting port 440 (hereinafter referred to as the small hit probability) is reduced to 1/4 (50 coefficients for 200 random values). Set. It should be noted that the small hit determination based on the starting prize of the first starting port 5442 is not performed. In other words, the probability that the small hit game will be started based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 440 is that the small hit game is started based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 5442. It is set higher than the probability of

Further, the number of STs is commonly set to 100 regardless of which of the first starting port 5442 and the second starting port 440 is a big hit. The ST (special time) is a probabilistic state in which the process ends according to the number of times (number-cut type). In the following, unless otherwise specified, "times" means the number of hit determinations (big hit determination and small hit determination) after the transition to the probabilistic state.

The number of STs is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 when the super-probability change state described later is reached. Specifically, 0 is displayed as an initial value in the super-probability change state. Then, each time the hit determination (the determination result is lost) is repeated once, a state in which the numerical value is added by 1 is displayed. Then, when the numerical value of the number of STs reaches 100, the super-probability change state ends. The initial value may be 100 instead of 0. In this way, when the initial value of the number of STs is 100, the numerical value is subtracted by 1 each time the hit determination is repeated once.

In addition, the number of prize balls for winning the first starting port 5442 is three, the number of prize balls for winning the second starting port 440 is one, and the number of prize balls for winning the general winning opening 53, 54, 450 is. The number of prize balls for winning 10 pieces and the prize opening 540 is set to 15, respectively. Further, the maximum number of winning counts per opening of the jackpot 540 in the jackpot game is set to 10 counts. In addition, the maximum number of winning counts per opening of the ordinary electric accessory 460 in the ordinary symbol game is set to 10 counts. In addition, the number of jackpot symbols is commonly set to 100 regardless of which of the first starting port 5442 and the second starting port 440 is a starting prize. Further, the number of small hit symbols in the case of starting winning of the second starting port 440 is set to 100.

Next, the specifications of the ordinary symbol game will be described with reference to FIG. 6 (b).

As shown in FIG. 6B, in the normal symbol game, the normal symbol determination is not performed in the low probability state. Further, the probability that the result of the normal symbol determination in the high probability state will be a hit is set to 100/100. Further, when the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit, the second starting port 440 (normal electric accessory 460) is opened three times for 1.5 seconds, which is a relatively long time.

Next, the distribution of big hits and small hits will be described with reference to FIG. 6 (c).

As shown in FIG. 6 (c), the jackpots due to the start winning of the first starting port 5442 are divided into six types of jackpot contents (big hit types). Specifically, the jackpot due to the start winning of the first starting port 5442 is divided into 15R probability variation, substantial 10R probability variation, substantial 5R probability variation, 15R normal, substantial 10R normal, and substantial 5R normal. These jackpot contents are set so as to correspond to the special figures (1) jackpots -1 to 6 as jackpots by the starting prize of the first starting port 5442, respectively.

Specifically, a 15R probability variation is set corresponding to the special figure (1) jackpot -1. In addition, a substantial 10R probability variation is set corresponding to the special figure (1) jackpot-2. In addition, a substantial 5R probability variation is set corresponding to the special figure (1) jackpot-3. Further, 15R normal is set corresponding to the special figure (1) jackpot-4. In addition, a substantial 10R normal is set corresponding to the special figure (1) jackpot-5. In addition, a substantial 5R normal is set corresponding to the special figure (1) jackpot-6.

In addition, the big hits due to the start winning of the second starting port 440 are distributed into 6 types of big hit contents (big hit types). Specifically, the jackpot due to the start winning of the second starting port 440 is divided into 15R probability variation, real ball output small probability variation, special probability variation, 15R normal, real ball output small normal, and special normal. These jackpot contents are set so as to correspond to special figures (2) jackpots -1 to 6 as jackpots by starting winning of the second starting port 440, respectively.

Specifically, a 15R probability variation is set corresponding to the special figure (2) jackpot -1. In addition, the actual ball output small probability change is set corresponding to the special figure (2) jackpot-2. In addition, a special probability variation is set corresponding to the special figure (2) jackpot-3. Further, 15R normal is set corresponding to the special figure (2) jackpot-4. In addition, in response to the special figure (2) jackpot -5, a small amount of actual balls is set. In addition, a special normal is set corresponding to the special figure (2) jackpot-6.

In addition, small hits are divided into two types of small hit contents (small hit types). Specifically, small hits are divided into two open (1) and two open (2). These small hit contents are set so as to correspond to the special figures (2) small hits -1 and 2 as small hits, respectively. Specifically, the opening (1) is set twice corresponding to the special figure (2) small hit -1. Further, the opening (2) is set twice corresponding to the special figure (2) small hit-2.

Here, the column (notation) of "number" shown in the table of FIG. 6C indicates the number of big hit symbols or the number of small hit symbols corresponding to each hit content. That is, since the number of jackpot symbols due to the starting prize of the first starting port 5442 is 100 as described above, the special figure (1) jackpots -1 to 6 are the jackpots due to the starting winning of the first starting port 5442. The probabilities (expected values) of distribution are set to be 25%, 15%, 10%, 25%, 15%, and 10%. Similarly, in the case of the special figure (2) jackpots -1 to 6 being jackpots due to the start winning of the second starting port 440, the probabilities (expected values) of being distributed are 25%, 15%, 10%, respectively. It is set to be 25%, 15%, and 10%. Similarly, in the special figure (2) small hits -1 and 2, when the small hits are made, the probability (expected value) of distribution is set to 98% and 2%, respectively.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6 (c), special figures (1) big hits -1 to 6, special figures (2) big hits -1 to 6, and special figures (2) small hits -1 and 2 are shown. The number of time reductions given after the end of each hit game (big hit game or small hit game) is set. The number of time reductions given after the end of the hit game is set to be different depending on the state of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game when the big hit determination or the small hit determination is performed.

Here, the notation of "HH" shown in the table of FIG. 6C indicates that the special symbol game is in the probabilistic state and the normal symbol game is in the time saving state. Further, the notation of "HL" indicates that the special symbol game is in the probabilistic state and the normal symbol game is in the non-time saving state. Further, the notation of "LH" indicates that the special symbol game is in the non-probability changing state and the normal symbol game is in the time saving state. Further, the notation of "LL" indicates that the special symbol game is in the non-probability changing state and the normal symbol game is in the non-time saving state. Further, the notation of "during high probability" indicates that during the high probability state, that is, a maximum of 100 time reductions are given in the special symbol game.

In such a setting, for example, when the special symbol game is in the non-probability state and the normal symbol game is in the non-time saving state (in the case of "LL"), the special symbol (1) jackpot -1 or 6 is a jackpot. , 50 times of time saving is given. On the other hand, for example, in the case of "LL" as well, if the jackpot is from 2 to 5 in the special figure (1) jackpot, the number of time reductions is not given. That is, in the case where the special symbol game is in the non-probability changing state and the normal symbol game is in the non-time saving state, if the jackpot is due to the start winning of the first starting port 5442, 35% (special symbol (1) jackpot- With a probability of 25% in the case of 1 + 10% in the case of special figure (1) jackpot -6), 50 time reductions are given, and with a remaining 65% probability, the time reductions are not given.

Further, in the case of a small hit, after the small hit game is completed, in principle, the game state before the small hit is not changed and is maintained as it is. Specifically, when a small hit is made during ST, after the small hit game is completed, ST is restarted so as to continuously count from the number of STs related to the hit determination which is the small hit. For example, if a small hit is reached at the 60th time during ST, the ST is restarted so as to count from the 61st time after the small hit game is completed. In this case, the remaining number of STs after the end of the small hit game is 40 times. Similarly, when a small hit is made during the time saving state, the time saving state is restarted so as to continuously count from the number of times related to the hit determination which became the small hit after the small hit game is completed.

As an exception to the above principle, for example, if a small hit is made at the 100th inning (the final round of ST) during ST, the ST will be in a state of being completed after the small hit game is completed (a state before the small hit is made). Is not maintained). Similarly, for example, if a small hit is made at the 100th time during the time saving state of 100 times, the time saving state is finished after the small hit game is completed (the state before the small hit is not maintained).

In the following, the hit contents (big hit contents and small hit contents) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 6 (d).

As described above, in the present embodiment, as the jackpot content (type of jackpot), 15R probability variation, 15R normal, real 10R probability variation, real 10R normal, real 5R probability change, real 5R normal, special probability change, special normal, real ball ejection A small probability change and a small number of actual balls are usually provided. Further, as the contents of the small hit (type of small hit), the opening twice (1) and (2) are provided.

15R probability variation and 15R normal are jackpots in which the number of open seconds of the jackpot 540 per round is set to 27.996 seconds in all rounds of all 15 rounds when the jackpot game is started. be. In this way, in the 15R probability variation and the 15R normal, when the big hit game is started, the maximum number of game balls can be set to win the big winning opening 540 in all rounds.

In the real 10R probability variation and the real 10R normal, when the big hit game is started, the number of open seconds of the big winning opening 540 per round is 27.996 seconds in the 1st to 10th rounds out of all 15 rounds. It is a big hit that is set and the number of open seconds of the big winning opening 540 per round is set to 0.102 seconds in the 11th to 15th rounds. In this way, in the real 10R probability variation and the real 10R normal, when the big hit game is started, the game ball is set so as to be able to win the big winning opening 540 in the 1st to 10th rounds, and in the 11th to 15th rounds. The game ball is set so as to be difficult (almost impossible) to win in the large winning opening 540.

In the real 5R probability variation and the real 5R normal, when the big hit game is started, the number of open seconds of the big winning opening 540 per round is 27.996 seconds in the 1st to 5th rounds out of all 15 rounds. It is a big hit that is set and the number of open seconds of the big winning opening 540 per round is set to 0.102 seconds in the 6th to 15th rounds. In this way, in the real 5R probability variation and the real 5R normal, when the big hit game is started, the game ball is set so as to be able to win the big winning opening 540 in the 1st to 5th rounds, and in the 6th to 15th rounds. The game ball is set so as to be difficult (almost impossible) to win in the large winning opening 540.

Special probability change and special normal are set so that when the big hit game is started, the big winning opening 540 is opened three times in the first round out of all 15 rounds, and the first round is concerned. The opening seconds of the large winning opening 540 are set to 0.896 seconds in the first and second opening of the above, and the opening seconds of the large winning opening 540 are set to 26.466 seconds in the remaining third opening. In the 15th round from the beginning, the number of open seconds of the big winning opening 540 per round is set to 27.966 seconds. In this way, in the special probability variation and the special normal, when the big hit game is started, it is difficult to win the game ball into the big winning opening 540 in the first and second opening in the first round (for example, 1 per opening). It is set so that the maximum number of game balls can be won in the large winning opening 540 in the remaining 3rd opening and the 2nd to 15th rounds. In the special probability variation and the special normal, the interval between the second opening and the third opening in the first round is set to 5.0 seconds.

When the big hit game is started, the number of seconds to open the big winning opening 540 per round is 0 in the 1st and 2nd rounds out of all 15 rounds. It is a big hit set to .896 seconds, and the number of open seconds of the big winning opening 540 per round is set to 0.102 seconds in the 3rd to 15th rounds. In this way, it is usually difficult to win a game ball in the big winning opening 540 in all rounds when the big hit game is started (more specifically, the first and second rounds). Is set so that, for example, one game ball is won for each opening, and the game ball cannot be won in the third and subsequent rounds). It should be noted that, in the actual ball output small probability change and the actual ball output small amount, the interval between the second round and the third round is usually set to 5.0 seconds.

The double opening (1) and (2) are small hits in which the large winning opening 540 is opened twice for 0.896 seconds each when the small hit game is started. That is, the small hit game is to operate the large winning opening 540 in a predetermined opening / closing mode. Thus, in the two opening (1) and (2), even if the small hit game is started, the game It is set so that it is difficult to win a ball in the large winning opening 540 (for example, one prize is won for each opening). In the second opening (1), the small hit end interval after the opening of the second large winning opening 540 is completed is set to 1.0 second. Further, in the second opening (2), the small hit end interval after the opening of the second large winning opening 540 is completed is set to 5.0 seconds.

In this way, when the type of big hit is special probability variation and special normal, the number of open seconds of the big winning opening 540 in the first and second opening of the first round, and when it is a small hit (opening twice (1)). And (in the case of (2)), the number of opening seconds of the large winning opening 540 in the first and second opening is set to 0.896 seconds, which is the same as each other. That is, the special probability variation and special normal and the small hit (opened twice (1) and (2)) have the same opening mode of the large winning opening 540 until the second opening of the large winning opening 540 is completed. Set. In this way, in the special probability variation and the special normal big hit game, in the first and second opening of the first round, the big winning opening 540 is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing mode (pseudo small hit opening and closing mode) that pretends to be a small hit game. It is something that makes you.

In the small hits (opening twice (1) and (2)), the hit end intervals after the opening of the second large winning opening 540 is completed are set so as to be different from each other. Specifically, in the second opening (1), the hit end interval after the opening of the second large winning opening 540 is completed is set to 1.0 second. Further, in the second opening (2), the winning end interval after the opening of the second large winning opening 540 is completed is set to 5.0 seconds.

In addition, the interval between the opening between the second opening and the third opening in the special probability variation and the special normal, and the small hit end interval in the second opening (2) of the small hits are the same number of seconds. It is set to (5.0 seconds). That is, the special probability variation and special normal and the small hit twice opening (2) are set in the same opening mode of the large winning opening 540 until the third opening of the large winning opening 540 is started. In other words, the special probability variation and the special normal jackpot game are found to be jackpot games after the third opening of the first round is performed. In this way, the special probability variation and the special normal big hit game are operated in the pseudo small hit opening / closing mode, and then the big winning opening 540 is opened / closed in the specific opening / closing mode (opening / closing mode after the big hit is found) which is found to be the big hit game. It is something to make.

Similarly, the number of seconds for opening the big winning opening 540 in the opening of the first and second rounds when the type of big hit is the real ball output small probability change and the real ball output small normal, and the case where the big hit is a small hit (opened twice). The number of opening seconds of the large winning opening 540 in the first and second opening of (1) and (2) is set to 0.896 seconds, which is the same as each other. That is, the real ball output small probability change and the actual ball output small normal, and the small hit (opened twice (1) and (2)) are the large winning opening 540 until the second opening of the large winning opening 540 is completed. The opening mode of is set to be the same.

In addition, the interval between rounds between the opening of the second round and the opening of the third round in the actual ball ejection small probability change and the actual ball ejection small amount normal, and the small hit end interval in the small hit opening twice (2). And are set to the same number of seconds (5.0 seconds) as each other. That is, the real ball output small probability change and the actual ball output small normal, and the small hit twice opening (2) are the opening modes of the large winning opening 540 until the third opening of the large winning opening 540 is started. Set to the same. In this way, in the normal big hit game with a small probability change of the actual number of balls and a small number of balls, the large winning opening 540 has a predetermined opening / closing mode (pseudo small hit opening / closing mode) that pretends to be a small hit game in the opening of the first and second rounds. Is to open and close.

[Game flow]
Hereinafter, the flow of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming progresses while repeating the transition to an appropriate gaming state at a predetermined timing. Here, the corresponding effect modes are set for each of the game states. Various production contents are set in the production mode. That is, when the game is started, the game shifts to an appropriate game state, and the effect mode corresponding to the shifted game state is produced. In the present embodiment, the effect modes 1 to 6 are mainly provided as the effect modes.

As shown in FIG. 7, at the start of the game, in many cases, the game state is the normal game state (non-probability change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state). Further, in the normal gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 1 is performed as the effect mode (step S900). The transition from the normal gaming state to another gaming state is mainly triggered by the result of the winning determination by the starting prize of the first starting port 5442. Exceptionally, for example, when there is a hold of the variation display of the second special symbol when the electric support state of 100 times is completed, the hit determination of the second special symbol is the maximum number of holds in the normal game state. It is performed up to 4 times, and if any big hit is made according to the judgment result, it will shift to the electric support state, but since it is a rare case, it is omitted from this drawing. In addition, since the above four times are in a state where it is possible to return to the electric support state if a big hit occurs at that time even though the electric support state has ended, it is a normal game state and the second special symbol While the hit determination is being performed, the player may have a sense of expectation as a special effect mode different from the effect mode 1.

In the normal game state, the jackpot determination is made by a so-called left-handed start winning of the first start port 5442. Further, when the result of the big hit determination by the start winning of the first starting port 5442 becomes a big hit and the gaming state shifts to the time saving (electric support) state, so-called right-handed hitting is performed. In this way, while the time saving (electric support) state continues, the jackpot determination is made by the starting prize of the second starting port 440. In addition, although the result of the big hit judgment by the start winning of the first starting port 5442 is a big hit, the game state does not shift to the time saving (electric support) state (the game state is the non-time saving (non-electric support) state). If it remains), left-handed strikes will continue.

When the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probability change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 1 is performed, the result of the jackpot determination (hit determination) is the special figure (1) jackpot. When it becomes -1, the game state shifts from the normal game state to the probabilistic state / time saving (electric support) state. Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 1 ends and the effect of the effect mode 2 starts (steps S901 and S902). In the gaming state in which the effect of the effect mode 2 is performed, the number of STs is set to 100 times, and the number of time reductions is set to 50 times.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S902 is the probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 2 is performed, the result of the jackpot determination (hit determination) is the special figure (2) jackpot-. When any of 1 to 3 is set, the gaming state shifts to the probabilistic change state / time saving (electric support) state (steps S910 and S911). That is, the gaming state after the transition is the same as the gaming state before the transition. Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 2 ends and the effect of the effect mode 3 starts. In the gaming state in which the effect of the effect mode 3 is performed, the number of STs is set to 100, and the number of time reductions is set to continue during the probability change state (up to 100 times).

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S911 is a probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the jackpot determination (hit determination) is the special figure (2) jackpot-. When any of 1 to 3 is reached, the gaming state shifts to the probabilistic state / time saving (electric support) state again (steps S912 and S911). Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 3 is continued. In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the number of STs and the number of time reductions counted up to the big hit are cleared. That is, the number of STs and the number of time reductions are counted from 0.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S911 is a probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the jackpot determination (hit determination) is the special figure (2) jackpot-. When any of 4 to 6 is set, the gaming state shifts to the non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state described later (steps S913 and S921). With the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 3 ends and the effect of the effect mode 4 starts.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S911 is a probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (hit determination) is a hit (opened twice (opened twice). In 1) and (2)), the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the hit. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number (100 times), the ST (probability variation state) and the time saving state are terminated, so that the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state. (Steps S914, S915; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 3 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 starts. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (100 times), the current gaming state (probability change state / time saving (electric support) state) is maintained, and the ST number and time saving number are cleared. The count is restarted (steps S914, S915; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 3 is continued.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S911 is in the probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 3 is performed, the results of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (hit determination) are lost. , The game state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number of times (100 times), the ST (probability change state) and the time saving state are terminated, so that the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state. (Steps S916, S915; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 3 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 starts. On the other hand, if the number of hit judgments related to the loss is not the predetermined number (100 times), the current gaming state (probability change state / time saving (electric support) state) is maintained, and the ST number and time saving number are cleared. The count is restarted (steps S916, S915; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 3 is continued.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S902 is the probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 2 is performed, the result of the jackpot determination (hit determination) is the special figure (2) jackpot-. When any of 4 to 6 is reached, the gaming state shifts to the non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state (steps S920 and S921). Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 2 ends and the effect of the effect mode 4 starts. In the gaming state in which the effect of the effect mode 4 is performed, the number of time reductions is set to 100 times.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S921 is a non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect mode 4 is performed, the result of the jackpot determination (hit determination) is the special figure (2) jackpot -1. When any of 3 to 3, the gaming state shifts to the probabilistic state / time saving (electric support) state (steps S922 and S911). Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 4 ends and the effect of the effect mode 3 starts. Along with this transition of the gaming state, the number of time reductions counted until the big hit is cleared.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S921 is a non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect mode 4 is performed, the result of the jackpot determination (hit determination) is the special figure (2) jackpot-4. When it becomes any of 6 to 6, the gaming state shifts to the non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state again (steps S923, S921). Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 4 is continued. In addition, with the transition of the game state, the number of time reductions counted until the big hit is cleared.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S921 is a non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect mode 4 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (hit determination) is a hit (opened twice (1). ) And (2)), the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the hit. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number (100 times), the time saving state ends, so that the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state (steps S924, S925; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 4 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 starts. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (100 times), the current gaming state (non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state) is maintained, and the time saving number is not cleared. , Counting is restarted (steps S924, S925; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 4 is continued.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S921 is a non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 4 is performed, the results of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (hit determination) are lost. Then, the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number of times (100 times), the time saving state ends, so that the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state (steps S926, S925; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 4 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 starts. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not the predetermined number (100 times), the current gaming state (non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state) is maintained, and the time saving number is not cleared. , Counting is restarted (steps S926, S925; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 4 is continued.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S902 is the probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 2 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (hit determination) is a hit (opened twice (opened twice). In 1) and (2)), the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the hit. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number (50 times), the ST (probability change state) continues, while the time reduction state ends, so that the probability change state / non-time reduction (probability change state / non-time reduction) The gaming state shifts to the non-electric support) state (steps S930, S931; Yes, S933). That is, the effect of the effect mode 2 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 5 starts. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (50 times), the current gaming state (probability change state / time saving (electric support) state) is maintained, and the ST number and time saving number are cleared. The count is restarted (steps S930, S931; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 2 is continued.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S902 is in the probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 2 is performed, the result of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (hit determination) becomes a loss. , The game state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number of times (50 times), the ST (probability change state) continues, while the time saving state ends, so that the probability change state / non-time reduction (probability change state / non-time reduction) The gaming state shifts to the non-electric support) state (steps S932, S931; Yes, S933). That is, the effect of the effect mode 2 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 5 starts. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not the predetermined number (50 times), the current gaming state (probability change state / time reduction (electric support)) is maintained, and the ST number and time reduction number are cleared. The count is restarted (steps S932, S931; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 2 is continued.

In this way, when the effect of the effect mode 2 ends and the effect of the effect mode 5 starts, the ST (probability change state) continues, while the time saving (electric support) state ends. That is, the player does not right-handed but left-handed. In the present embodiment, the effect of the effect mode 5 is set to the same content as the effect of the effect mode 1. In this way, when the effect of the effect mode 5 is started, the player is in a game state (latent probability change state) in which it is difficult to recognize that the ST (probability change state) is continuing. The effect of the effect mode 5 may be the same as the effect of the effect mode 1, and may be performed by notifying the player that the latent probability change state has been determined.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S933 is a probability change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is the special figure (1). When either the jackpot -1 or 2 is reached, the gaming state shifts to the probability change state / time saving (electric support) state (steps S934 and S911). Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 5 ends and the effect of the effect mode 3 starts. With this transition of the gaming state, the number of STs counted up to the big hit is cleared.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S933 is a probabilistic state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is the special figure (1). When the jackpot is -3, the gaming state shifts to the probabilistic state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state again (steps S935 and S933). Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 5 is continued. In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the number of STs counted up to the big hit is cleared.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S933 is a probability change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is the special figure (1). When either the jackpot-4 or 5 is reached, the gaming state shifts to the non-probability change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state (that is, the normal gaming state) (steps S936 and S900). Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 5 ends and the effect of the effect mode 1 starts. With this transition of the gaming state, the number of STs counted up to the big hit is cleared.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S933 is a probability change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is the special figure (1). When the jackpot reaches -6, the gaming state shifts to the non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state (steps S937 and S951). Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 5 ends and the effect of the effect mode 6 starts. With this transition of the gaming state, the number of STs counted up to the big hit is cleared.

Further, if the game state shown in step S933 is a probabilistic change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, if the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is lost, the said. The game state is changed according to the number of hit judgments related to loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number, the ST (probability change state) ends, so that the game state shifts to the normal game state (steps S938, S939; Yes). , S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 5 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 starts. On the other hand, if the number of hit judgments related to the loss is not the predetermined number, the current gaming state (probability change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state) is maintained, the ST number is not cleared, and the count is counted. It is restarted (steps S938, S939; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 5 is continued.

The predetermined number of times in step S939 is set according to what triggered the production of the production mode 5 currently being performed. Specifically, when the production of the production mode 5 currently being performed is started when the number of hit determinations reaches 50 after the production of the production mode 2 is started (step S931; Yes). ), The predetermined number of times in step S939 is 50 times (from the start of the effect of the effect mode 5). On the other hand, the effect of the effect mode 5 currently being performed is the special figure (1) jackpot-2 or 3 shown in step S960, or the special figure (1) jackpot-3 shown in step S935. When the operation is started with the above as an opportunity, the predetermined number of times in step S939 is 100 times (from the start of the effect in the effect mode 5).

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probability change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (1). ) When the jackpot reaches -6, the game state shifts from the normal game state to the non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state. Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 1 ends and the effect of the effect mode 6 starts (steps S950 and S951). In the gaming state in which the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the number of time reductions is set to 50 times.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S951 is a non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the result of the jackpot determination (hit determination) is the special figure (2) jackpot. When any of -1 to 3 is set, the gaming state shifts to the probabilistic change state / time saving (electric support) state (steps S952 and S911). Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 6 ends and the effect of the effect mode 3 starts. Along with this transition of the gaming state, the number of time reductions counted until the big hit is cleared.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S951 is a non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the result of the jackpot determination (hit determination) is the special figure (2) jackpot. When any of -4 to 6, the gaming state shifts to the non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state (steps S953, S921). Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 6 ends and the effect of the effect mode 4 starts. Along with this transition of the gaming state, the number of time reductions counted until the big hit is cleared.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S951 is a non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (hit determination) is a hit (opened twice). In (1) and (2)), the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the hit. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number (50 times), the time saving state ends, so that the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state (steps S954, S955; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 6 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 starts. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (50 times), the current gaming state (non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state) is maintained, and the time saving number is not cleared. , Counting is restarted (steps S954, S955; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 6 is continued.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S951 is a non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the results of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (hit determination) are lost. Then, the game state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number of times (50 times), the time saving state ends, so that the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state (steps S956, S955; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 6 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 starts. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not the predetermined number (50 times), the current gaming state (non-probability change state / time reduction (electric support)) is maintained, and the time reduction number is not cleared. Counting is resumed (steps S956, S955; No).

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probability change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (1). ) When the jackpot is -2 or 3, the gaming state shifts to the probabilistic state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state (steps S960 and S933). That is, the effect of the effect mode 1 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 5 starts.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probability change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (1). ) When the jackpot reaches -4 or 5, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state again. Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 1 is continued (steps S970 and S900).

Further, when the game state shown in step S900 is a non-probability change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 1 is performed, if the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is lost, The normal gaming state is maintained. That is, the effect of the effect mode 1 is continued (steps S980 and S900).

In such a game flow, when the effect mode 2 is started (step S902), the number of STs is set to 100 by shifting the game state to the probability change state / time saving (electric support) state. NS. Similarly, when the effect mode 3 is started (step S911), the number of STs is set to 100 by shifting the game state to the probabilistic change state / time saving (electric support) state. In this way, after the effect mode 2 or 3 is started (that is, after the ST is started), for example, when the result of the hit determination is a small hit, the current gaming state is maintained after the end of the small hit game (in principle). , ST count is not cleared and counting is restarted. In this way, the effect of the effect mode 2 or 3 is continued.

Here, as described above, when the small hit game is started, the large winning opening 540 is opened twice to the extent that one game ball is won for each opening. That is, when the effect mode 2 or 3 is started (when the ST is started), for example, until the number of hit determinations becomes a predetermined number and the effect mode ends (until the ST ends). In the meantime), the small hit game can be repeated. In this way, when the small hit game is repeatedly performed, the prize ball can be acquired by the small hit game, and the number of game balls in the player's hand can be increased.

In the following, an ST capable of acquiring a prize ball by a small hit game and increasing the number of game balls in the player's hand is referred to as a super-probability change state. Further, a game in which a prize ball is acquired by a small hit game after the super-probability state is reached and the number of game balls in the player's hand is increased is referred to as RUSH. That is, the rush (per time) shall continue from the big hit that triggered the transition to the super-probability change state to the next big hit or the end of the time saving state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the game in which the time saving state ends (for example, the game of 100 times or 50 times of the hit determination described later) is the end condition of the rush.

If the effect mode 3 is started by any of the jackpots -1 to 3 in the special figure (2) after the effect mode 2 is started, the game states before and after the jackpot are also in a super-probable state. Therefore, it is assumed that the super-probability change state continues. In such a case, it is assumed that the rush has been performed continuously (the second rush has been performed).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the super-probability change state is reached, the ball ejection display regarding the acquired ball ejection is performed. A detailed description of the payout display will be described later.

[Explanation of operation of main control circuit]
Hereinafter, the processing performed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) will be described.

[Main processing]
First, the main processing performed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S10, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a backup restoration process, an initialization setting process, and the like. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S11.

In step S11, the main CPU 101 performs a random number value update process. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the initial value random value counter, the effect condition selection random value counter, and the like. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S12.

In step S12, the main CPU 101 performs a timer update process. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates various timers such as a timer for synchronizing the main CPU 101 and the sub CPU 201, and an opening time timer of the large winning opening 540. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S13.

In step S13, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol control process. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the hit determination result is a hit according to the detection signal from the first start port switch 5472 or the second start port switch 441, and stores the determination result in the main RAM 103. Perform processing, etc. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S14. The details of this process will be described later.

In step S14, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol control process. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit according to the detection signal from the passing gate switch 49a, and performs a process of storing the determination result in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S15.

In step S15, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol display device control process. In this process, the main CPU 101 has the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 according to the determination results of the hit determination and the normal symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 in the processes in steps S13 and S14. A process of storing the control signal for driving the normal symbol display unit 71 and the normal symbol display unit 71 in the main RAM 103 is performed. The main CPU 101 transmits the stored control signal to the first special symbol display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74, and the normal symbol display unit 71. In this way, the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 fluctuates and stops the special symbol based on the received control signal. Further, the normal symbol display unit 71 fluctuates and stops the normal symbol based on the received control signal. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S16.

In step S16, the main CPU 101 performs game information output processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs game information to an external device (for example, the calling device, the hall computer, or the like). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S17.

In step S17, the main CPU 101 performs port output processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs a control signal for driving the large winning opening 540 (shutter 610) and the second starting opening 440 (ordinary electric accessory 460). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S18.

In step S18, the main CPU 101 performs a command output process. In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits various commands to the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU 201). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S19.

In step S19, the main CPU 101 performs a payout process. In this process, the main CPU 101 wins a game ball in various winning openings (specifically, a large winning opening 540, a first starting opening 5442, a second starting opening 440, and a general winning opening 53, 54, 450). It is determined whether or not it has been done. When the main CPU 101 determines that the game ball has won a prize in various winning openings, the main CPU 101 transmits a payout request command corresponding to the winning to the payout / launch control circuit 300. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S11 again, and repeats the processes from step S11 to step S19.

[System timer interrupt processing]
Hereinafter, the system timer interrupt process performed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) will be described with reference to FIG.
The system timer interrupt process is performed by interrupting the main process at predetermined intervals even when the main process is being performed.

In step S20, the main CPU 101 performs a register save process. In this process, the main CPU 101 saves the running program stored in the register. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S21.

In step S21, the main CPU 101 performs a random number value update process. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the jackpot determination random number value counter, the jackpot symbol determination random number value counter, and the like. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S22.

In step S22, the main CPU 101 performs a switch input process. In this process, the main CPU 101 uses various switches (specifically, a first start port switch 5472, a second start port switch 441, a passing gate switch 49a, a count switch 541, and a general winning port switch 53a, 54a, 451. Etc.) is determined whether or not a signal is input to (that is, whether or not a game ball is detected by various switches). When the main CPU 101 determines that the game ball has been detected in any of the various switches (when the game ball wins in any of the various winning openings), the main CPU 101 transmits a command to the sub control circuit 200. .. For example, when the count switch 541 counts (detects) a game ball, the main CPU 101 transmits a large winning opening winning command to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S23. The details of this process will be described later.

In step S23, the main CPU 101 performs a register reset process. In this process, the main CPU 101 returns the saved program to the register. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Special symbol control processing]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (special symbol control process) performed in step S13 of FIG. 9 will be described with reference to FIG.
In FIG. 11, the numerical values described on the sides of steps S101 to S108 indicate the control state flags corresponding to these steps. Here, the control state flag indicates the state of the game of the special symbol game, and enables any of the processes from step S101 to step S108 to be executed. The numerical value is stored in a storage area that functions as a control state flag in the main RAM 103.

In step S100, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading the control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 101 reads out the control state flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S101.

In steps S101 to S108, which will be described later, the main CPU 101 executes a step corresponding to the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. More specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to perform processing in each step based on the value of the control state flag, and according to the determination result, each at a predetermined timing set for each step. Perform the processing in the step. As a result, the specific symbol game is advanced. The predetermined timing is determined according to a waiting time timer or the like. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine without performing the processing in each step, and performs another subroutine. In addition to this subroutine, the main CPU 101 also performs the system timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 10 at predetermined cycles.

In step S101, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol memory check process. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S102.

In step S102, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol fluctuation time management process. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag as a value (01H) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management, and when the fluctuation time elapses, sets the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management as the control state flag. Is set to, and the waiting time (for example, 600 ms) after confirmation is set in the waiting time timer. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S103 after the waiting time has elapsed after the determination. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S103.

In step S103, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol display time management process. In this process, the main CPU 101 has a control state flag of a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management, and when the waiting time elapses after confirmation, the result of the hit determination is a hit (big hit or small hit). It is determined whether or not it is. When the result of the hit determination is a hit, the main CPU 101 sets a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management in the control state flag, and sets the time corresponding to the hit start interval in the waiting time timer. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S104 after the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed. On the other hand, the main CPU 101 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when the result of the hit determination is a loss. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to execute the process of step S108. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S104.

In step S104, the main CPU 101 performs a hit start interval management process. In this process, the main CPU 101 sends a signal to the effect that the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management and the large winning opening 540 is opened when the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed. , Supply to the large winning opening solenoid 620. As a result, the main CPU 101 controls the opening and closing of the large winning opening 540.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (04H) indicating that the large winning opening is open in the control state flag, and sets the opening upper limit time (for example, about 0.1 seconds or about 30 seconds) to the large winning opening opening time timer. Set to. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S105. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S105.

In step S105, the main CPU 101 performs the large winning opening reopening waiting time management process. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the large winning opening reopening count counter when the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the large winning opening reopening waiting time management and the time corresponding to the inter-round interval elapses. The memory is updated so as to increase by "1". The main CPU 101 sets a value (04H) indicating that the large winning opening is open in the control state flag. The main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, about 0.1 second or about 30 seconds) in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S106. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S106.

In step S106, the main CPU 101 performs a large winning opening opening process. In this process, when the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating that the large winning opening is open, the main CPU 101 has elapsed the condition that the large winning opening winning counter is "10" or more, and the opening upper limit time has elapsed ( It is determined whether or not any of the conditions that the large winning opening opening time timer is "0") is satisfied. When any of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the grand prize opening 540. Then, it is determined whether or not the condition that the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or more than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening number (the final round) is satisfied. The main CPU 101 sets a value (06H) indicating the winning end interval in the control state flag when it is the final round, and sets a value (05H) indicating the large winning opening reopening waiting time management when it is not the final round. Set to the control status flag. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S107.

In step S107, the main CPU 101 performs a hit end interval process. In this process, the main CPU 101 controls a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval and the time corresponding to the hit end interval elapses. Set to the status flag. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S108. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S108.

In step S108, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol game end process. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (00H) indicating the special symbol memory check when the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S101. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

As described above, the special symbol game is advanced by setting the control state flag by the main CPU 101. Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags to "00H", "01H", "02H", and "07H" when the result of the hit determination is lost in the case where the game is not in the big hit or small hit game state. By setting in this order, the processes of step S101, step S102, step S103, and step S108 shown in FIG. 11 are performed at predetermined timings. Further, when the main CPU 101 is not in the big hit or small hit gaming state and the result of the hit determination is the big hit or the small hit, the control state flags are set to "00H", "01H", "02H", "03H". By setting in this order, the processes of step S101, step S102, step S103, and step S104 shown in FIG. 11 are performed at predetermined timings to control the big hit or small hit gaming state. Further, when the main CPU 101 is controlled to the big hit or small hit gaming state, the control state flags are set in the order of "04H" and "05H", so that steps S105 and S106 shown in FIG. 11 are set. Is performed at a predetermined timing to perform a big hit or a small hit game. Further, when the end condition of the big hit or small hit game is satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "04H", "06H", and "07H", so that step S105 shown in FIG. 11 The processes of steps S107 and S108 are performed at predetermined timings to end the big hit or small hit game.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (special symbol memory check process) performed in step S101 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S110, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (00H) indicating a special symbol memory check. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol memory check, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S111. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not a value indicating the special symbol memory check, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

In step S111, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the presence / absence of start storage. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no start memory of the special symbol game, that is, from the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) or the second special symbol start storage. If the data (hit determination random value) is not stored in the second special symbol start storage area (4) from the area (0), the process is transferred to step S112. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is a start memory (more specifically, a start memory corresponding to at least one of the first and second special symbols), the process shifts to step S113.

In step S112, the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a demo display permission value in the main RAM 103. When the state in which the start memory of the special symbol game becomes 0 is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the main CPU 101 sets a value that permits execution of the demo display as the demo display permission value. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the demo display command when the demo display permission value is a predetermined value. The demo display command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the demo display is performed on the liquid crystal display device 16 under the control of the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S113, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is 0. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines the presence / absence of data from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is 0. That is, when it is determined that no data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process is transferred to step S115. On the other hand, in the main CPU 101, the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is not 0, that is, data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). If it is determined, the process is moved to step S114.

In step S114, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (02H) indicating that the second special symbol is fluctuating as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S116.

In step S115, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (01H) indicating that the first special symbol is fluctuating as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S116.

In step S116, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol fluctuation time management as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S117.

In step S117, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage transfer process. In this process, when the special symbol to be variablely displayed is the first special symbol, the main CPU 101 displays each of the data from the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). A process of shifting (storing) from the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (3) is performed. Further, when the special symbol to be variablely displayed is the second special symbol, the main CPU 101 displays the data of the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) in the second. A process of shifting (storing) from the special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (3) is performed. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S118.

In step S118, the main CPU 101 performs a jackpot determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 reads out the high probability flag, and selects one hit judgment table from a plurality of hit judgment tables having different numbers of judgment values (big hit judgment values) to be big hits based on the read high probability flag. do. That is, when the high probability flag is a predetermined value, the hit (big hit) judgment table for high probability with a large number of big hit judgment values is referred to, and when the high probability flag is not a predetermined value, the big hit judgment is made. A normal hit (big hit) judgment table with a small value is referred to. As described above, when the high probability flag is a predetermined value, that is, when the gaming state is the high probability state (probability variation state), the probability of shifting to the jackpot gaming state is higher than in the normal time.

Then, the main CPU 101 is extracted at the time of winning a start, and is a random value for hit determination of the special symbol start storage area previously set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). And the selected hit determination table. Then, when the hit determination random number value and the jackpot determination value match, the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot is a jackpot. On the other hand, when the hit determination random number value and the jackpot determination value do not match, the main CPU 101 determines that the hit determination is not a jackpot (missing). In this way, in the jackpot determination process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to set the jackpot gaming state advantageous to the player (big hit determination). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S119.

In step S119, the main CPU 101 performs a small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is performed when the large hit determination process in step S118 is not a large hit. In this process, the main CPU 101 presets the hit determination random value of the special symbol start storage area set earlier in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). It is determined whether or not the determination value of the small hit is the same. Then, when the hit determination random number value and the small hit determination value match, the main CPU 101 determines that the hit is a small hit. On the other hand, when the hit determination random number value and the small hit determination value do not match, the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a small hit (it is a loss). In this way, the main CPU 101 determines in the small hit determination process whether or not to enter the small hit game state (small hit determination).

In the present embodiment, two types of hit judgment tables, one for normal use and the other for high probability (probability variation), are prepared as the hit judgment random value stored in the first special symbol start storage area and the hit judgment table to be referred to. Two types of hit judgment tables, one for normal use and the other for high probability (probability variation), are prepared as the hit judgment random value stored in the second special symbol start storage area and the hit judgment table to be referred to, for a total of four types of hit judgment. A table is prepared. The two types of hit determination tables for normal use have the same jackpot probability, and the two types of hit determination tables for high probability have the same jackpot probability. On the other hand, the number of small hit judgment values in the normal hit judgment table and the high probability (probability variation) hit judgment table, which are referred to as the hit judgment random values stored in the first special symbol start storage area. Is the same. Further, the number of small hit judgment values in the normal hit judgment table and the high probability (probability variation) hit judgment table referred to as the hit judgment random value stored in the second special symbol start storage area is the same. Is. In this way, the main CPU 101 has a th A hit game state of 1, a second hit game state in which a small amount of game balls can be obtained as compared with the first hit game state, and a third hit in which a game ball equivalent to the second hit game state can be obtained. This is an example of a hit determination means for determining whether or not to shift to the gaming state.

The small hit probability due to winning the first starting port 5442 in the normal game may be larger or smaller than the small hit probability due to winning the second starting port 440. The jackpot probability of winning a prize at the first starting port 5442 of a normal game may be larger or smaller than the jackpot probability of winning a prize at the second starting port 440.

In this way, by the processing of steps S118 and S119, one of a big hit, a small hit, and a loss is determined as a result of the hit determination for the special symbol game. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S120.

In step S120, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines a big hit symbol when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, determines a small hit symbol when the result of the hit determination is a small hit, and when it is neither a big hit nor a small hit, That is, in the case of loss, the loss pattern is determined. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S121.

In step S121, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern for determining the special symbol variation pattern based on the special symbol determined in the process of step S120 and the result of the hit determination determined in the processes of steps S118 and S119. Select a table. Then, the main CPU 101 determines (selects) a variation pattern based on the effect condition determination random number value extracted from the effect condition determination random number counter and the selected variation pattern determination table. The main CPU 101 stores the selected fluctuation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines the variation display mode of the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 based on the data showing such a variation pattern.

The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied to the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74. As a result, the special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 in the determined variation pattern. Further, the data indicating the fluctuation pattern stored in this way is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command. As a result, under the control of the sub-control circuit 200, the effect display corresponding to the received special figure fluctuation pattern designation command is performed. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S122.

In step S122, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol fluctuation time setting process. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined special symbol fluctuation pattern in the waiting time timer. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S123.

In step S123, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a special symbol effect start command in the main RAM 103. The special symbol effect start command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. The sub-control circuit 200 starts the effect based on the received special symbol effect start command. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S124.

In step S124, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the fluctuation display this time. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Special symbol determination process]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (special symbol determination process) performed in step S120 of FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S150, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the jackpot determination in step S118 is a jackpot. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S151. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is not a jackpot, the process shifts to step S156.

In step S151, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the fluctuation state number is (01H). When the main CPU 101 determines that the fluctuation state number is (01H), the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S152. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the fluctuation state number is not (01H), the process shifts to step S154.

In step S152, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol based on the jackpot symbol determination random value and the hit determination table extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S153.

In step S153, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the data of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the command of the jackpot symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the first special symbol display unit 73. The first special symbol display unit 73 fluctuates the first special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a command of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies the command of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. As a result, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the jackpot stop display mode under the control of the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S162.

In step S154, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol based on the jackpot symbol determination random value and the hit determination table extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S155.

In step S155, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the data of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol and the command of the jackpot symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the second special symbol display unit 74. The second special symbol display unit 74 fluctuates the second special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a command of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies the command of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. As a result, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the jackpot stop display mode under the control of the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S162.

In step S156, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether the result of the small hit determination in step S119 is a small hit. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit determination is a small hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S160. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit determination is not a small hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S164.

In step S160, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining a small hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the small hit symbol of the second special symbol based on the random number value extracted from the big hit symbol determination counter. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S161.

In step S161, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the data of the small hit symbol of the second special symbol and the command of the small hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the small hit symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the second special symbol display unit 74. The second special symbol display unit 74 fluctuates the second special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the small hit symbol of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a command of the small hit symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies the command of the small hit symbol of the second special symbol from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. .. As a result, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the small hit stop display mode under the control of the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S162.

In step S162, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the hit start interval display time data corresponding to the hit symbols (big hit symbol, small hit symbol). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the hit start interval display time data corresponding to the hit symbols (big hit symbol, small hit symbol) in the predetermined area of the main RAM 103 in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S163.

In step S163, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting data related to the number of times the large winning opening is opened. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the data related to the number of times the large winning opening is opened in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S164, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the lost symbol data and the lost symbol command. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and depending on whether the fluctuating special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first special symbol display unit. It is supplied to 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74. The first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 fluctuates the special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the lost symbol of the special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a command of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies the command of the lost symbol from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. As a result, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the loss stop display mode under the control of the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Special symbol fluctuation time management process]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (special symbol fluctuation time management process) performed in step S102 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S200, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol fluctuation time management. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S201. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not a value (01H) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

In step S201, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time timer is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S202. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S202, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management as a control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management in the control state flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S203.

In step S203, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a symbol stop command. The symbol stop command data is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the symbol stop. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S204.

In step S204, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a waiting time timer as a waiting time after confirmation. In this process, the main CPU 101 stores the waiting time after determination in the area that functions as the waiting time timer in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Special symbol display time management process]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (special symbol display time management process) performed in step S103 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16.

In step S300, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the process shifts to step S301. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

In step S301, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S302. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S304.

In step S302, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the jackpot determination in step S118 is a jackpot. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S303. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is not a jackpot, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S303, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the game state flag of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S304, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the jackpot determination in step S118 is a jackpot. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S311. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is not a jackpot, the process shifts to step S305.

In step S305, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time reduction counter of the main RAM 103 is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the time reduction counter is "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S325. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the time reduction counter is not "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S306.

In step S306, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time reduction counter of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S307.

In step S307, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time reduction counter of the main RAM 103 is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the time reduction counter is “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S308. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the time reduction counter is not "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S325.

In step S308, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the time reduction flag of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S309.

In step S309, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the time saving end command in the main RAM 103. The time saving end command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the time saving end. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S325.

In step S325, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ST count counter of the main RAM 103 is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the ST count counter is “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S310. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the ST count counter is not "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S326.

In step S326, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the ST count counter of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S327.

In step S327, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ST count counter of the main RAM 103 is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the ST count counter is “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S328. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the ST count counter is not "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S310.

In step S328, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the ST count flag of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S329.

In step S329, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the ST end command in the main RAM 103. The ST end command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the end of ST. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S310.

In step S310, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether the result of the small hit determination in step S119 is a small hit. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit determination is a small hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S311. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit determination is not a small hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S315.

In step S311 the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management process as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S312.

In step S312, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a waiting time timer as a hit start interval time corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol). In this process, the main CPU 101 stores the hit start interval time in the area that functions as the waiting time timer in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S313. The hit start interval time is also determined for each hit type, but in this embodiment, at least special probability variation, special normal, real ball output small probability variation, real ball output small normal and special figure (2) small hit-2 The hit start interval time is set to the same time or a time that is difficult for the player to distinguish (for example, 1 second).

In step S313, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a special symbol effect stop command. The special symbol effect stop command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the stop of the special symbol effect. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the step S314 process.

In step S314, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big hit start command or a small hit start command corresponding to the special symbol. The big hit start command or the small hit start command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the start of a big hit or a small hit. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S315, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating a special symbol game end process as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S316.

In step S316, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a special symbol effect stop command. The special symbol effect stop command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the stop of the special symbol effect. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Hit start interval management process]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (hit start interval management process) performed in step S104 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S401, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management process. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the process shifts to step S402. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

In step S402, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S403. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S403, the main CPU 101 sets the upper limit value of the large winning opening opening number counter of the main RAM 103.

In step S404, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the large winning opening opening count counter of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S405.

In step S405, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting an opening / closing pattern for each round or small hit according to the type of the big hit symbol. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S406.

In step S406, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a large winning opening opening display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. In this case, the display command for opening the large winning opening is the data indicating the first round. The large winning opening opening display command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a large winning opening opening command. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S407.

In step S407, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating a large winning opening reopening waiting time management process as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S408.

In step S408, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the large winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S409.

In step S409, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the opening time of the large winning opening in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S410.

In step S410, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the large winning opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the variables positioned in the main RAM 103 based on the data read from the main ROM 102 in order to open the big winning opening 540. The variable stored in this way drives the large winning opening solenoid 620 to open the large winning opening 540. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Large winning opening reopening waiting time management process]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (large winning opening reopening waiting time management process) performed in step S105 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S500, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the large winning opening reopening waiting time management process. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the large winning opening reopening waiting time management process, the process is transferred to step S501. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not a value (05H) indicating the large winning opening reopening waiting time management process, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

In step S501, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S502. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S502, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the large winning opening opening number counter of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S503.

In step S503, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a large winning opening opening display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. In this case, the display command for opening the large winning opening is data indicating the second and subsequent rounds. The display command data during the opening of the winning opening is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. The large winning opening opening display command includes an instruction to perform the round counter +1 to the sub CPU 201. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S504.

In step S504, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating a large winning opening opening process as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S505.

In step S505, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the jackpot determination in step S118 is a jackpot. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S506. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big hit determination is not a big hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S507.

In step S506, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the large winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S507.

In step S507, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the opening time of the large winning opening in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S508.

In step S508, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the large winning opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Large winning opening opening process]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (large winning opening opening process) performed in step S106 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S600, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the large winning opening opening process. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the large winning opening opening process, the process shifts to step S601. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not a value (04H) indicating the large winning opening opening process, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

In step S601, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the large winning opening winning counter is "10" or more. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that the large winning opening winning counter is "10" or more, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S604. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the large winning opening winning counter is not "10" or more, the process shifts to step S602.

In step S602, the main CPU 101 performs a large winning opening opening / closing process according to the opening / closing pattern for each set round or small hit. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of opening and closing the large winning opening 540 according to the opening / closing pattern for each round or small hit set in step S405. Specifically, the process of opening and closing the large winning opening 540 a plurality of times during a predetermined round by repeating the process of closing and opening the large winning opening 540 after waiting for a time according to the opening / closing pattern of each round or small hit. I do. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S603.

Here, in the present embodiment, the special probability variation, the special normal interval time between the first opening and the second opening of the first round, and the first opening and the second opening of the special figure (2) small hit-2. The interval time between openings is set to a time (for example, 0.1 second) that is the same or difficult for the player to distinguish. That is, in the process of step S602, the special probability variation, the special normal, and the special figure (2) small hit-2 are "0.896 seconds open time → 0.1 seconds open interval time → 0.896 seconds open. It will be executed in the order of "time". Further, although it is not processed in this step but is set in step S607, the actual ball output small probability change and the actual ball output small amount are the same or the interval time between the normal first and second rounds is also the same or By setting a time that is difficult for the player to distinguish (for example, 0.1 seconds), "the opening time of the first round of 0.896 seconds → the interval time between rounds of 0.1 seconds → the two rounds of 0.896 seconds" It will be executed in the order of "opening time of eyes". As a result, it is difficult for the player to distinguish the winning type even based on the time when the big winning opening 540 is closed.

In step S603, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the waiting time timer as the large winning opening opening time timer is “0”. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S604. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S604, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the large winning opening closing data. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 based on the data read from the main ROM 102 in order to close the big winning opening 540. The variable stored in this way closes the grand prize opening solenoid 620. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S605.

In step S605, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether the result of the small hit determination in step S119 is a small hit. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit determination is a small hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S610. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit determination is not a small hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S606.

In step S606, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the large winning opening opening count value is equal to or greater than the large winning opening opening number upper limit value. In this process, the main CPU 101 compares the large winning opening opening count value stored in the main RAM 103 with the large winning opening opening number upper limit value or more, and the large winning opening opening count value is the large winning opening opening count value. Determine if it is greater than or equal to the upper limit. When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the number of opening of the winning opening, the process proceeds to step S610. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the large winning opening opening count value is not equal to or greater than the winning opening opening number upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S607.

In step S607, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the open time interval display time in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S608.

In step S608, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (05H) indicating a large winning opening reopening waiting time management process as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S609.

In step S609, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting an inter-round display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. The inter-round display command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S610, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S611.

In step S611, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval process as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S612.

In step S612, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a special symbol per interval end display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. Specifically, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the big hit end display command is set, and when the result of the hit determination is a small hit, the small hit end display command is set. The big hit end display command and the small hit end display command are supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Hit end interval processing]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (hit end interval processing) executed in step S107 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S700, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 103 is a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval process. When it is determined that the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval processing, the processing shifts to step S701. If it is not determined that the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval processing, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S701, when the control state flag of the main RAM 103 has a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval processing, the value of the waiting time timer (t) corresponding to the hit end interval is “0”. Judge whether or not. Further, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S702 when the value of the waiting time timer is "0", and ends this subroutine when the value of the waiting time timer is not "0".

In step S702, the main CPU 101 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game of the main RAM 103 in the control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S703.

In step S703, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol and the control data according to the game state in the predetermined area of the main RAM 103. Specifically, as control data, a game state such as a normal game state and a probability change state is set. Further, the main CPU 101 hits the sub control circuit 200 and transmits an end command. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Special symbol game end processing]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (special symbol game end processing) executed in step S108 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S710, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 103 is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process. If it is determined that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, the processing is transferred to step S711. If it is not determined that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S711, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a special symbol memory check in the main RAM 103 as a control state flag. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Explanation of operation of sub control circuit]
Hereinafter, the processing of the sub control circuit 200 will be described. The sub control circuit 200 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100, and the sub CPU 201 performs various processes such as display processing.

[Sub-control main processing]
First, the sub-control main process performed by the sub-CPU 201 of the sub-control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S1101, the sub CPU 201 performs the initialization process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 initializes the work area of the work RAM 203 in response to the power being turned on. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1102.

In step S1102, the sub CPU 201 performs a random number value update process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 updates the random number values stored in the work RAM 203 (for example, the random value for determining the effect, the random value for determining the jackpot effect, the random value for determining the stop symbol, and the like). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1103.

In step S1103, the sub CPU 201 performs a command analysis process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 analyzes the command stored in the receive buffer of the work RAM 203. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1104.

In step S1104, the sub CPU 201 performs the effect control process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 controls the effect using the effect button 62. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1105.

In step S1105, the sub CPU 201 performs display control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 transmits data for displaying in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 to the display control circuit 204. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1106.

When data is received from the sub CPU 201 in the display control circuit 204, the VDP of the display control circuit 204 receives various types of identification symbol data, background image data, production image data, and the like based on the received data. The image data of is read from the image data ROM. The VDP superimposes various image data read from the image data ROM and displays them in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

In step S1106, the sub CPU 201 performs sound / lamp control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 controls the sound generated from the speaker 24 and controls the light emission of various lamps such as the lamp 25. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1107.

In step S1107, the sub CPU 201 performs the accessory control process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 controls the operation (mechanical operation and lighting operation) of the movable accessory unit 57 via the accessory control circuit 207. The operation of the movable accessory unit 57 performed by the sub CPU 201 is controlled by controlling the operations of the first movable accessory unit (effect device 2400), the second movable accessory unit 82, and the third movable accessory unit 83. Is included. When this process is completed, the process is again moved to the random number value update process in step S1102.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Even in the state where the sub-control main process shown in FIG. 22 is being performed, the sub-control main process may be interrupted and the timer interrupt process may be performed. Hereinafter, the timer interrupt processing performed by the sub CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 23.

In step S1201, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 201 saves the value used in the running program stored in each register (storage area). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1202.

In step S1202, the sub CPU 201 performs a timer update process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 updates the timer stored in the work RAM 203. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 updates a timer for round effect and the like. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1203.

In step S1203, the sub CPU 201 performs the effect button switch input detection process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 detects whether or not the effect button switch 310 is input by operating the effect button 62. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1204.

In step S1204, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the register. In this process, the sub CPU 201 restores the value saved in step S201 to each register. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

[Command interrupt processing]
Even in the state in which the sub-control main process shown in FIG. 22 is being executed, the sub-control main process may be interrupted and the command interrupt process may be performed. Hereinafter, the command interrupt processing performed by the sub CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 24.

In step S1301, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 201 saves the value used in the running program stored in each register (storage area). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1302.

In step S1302, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of storing the received command in the buffer. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1303.

In step S1303, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the register. In this process, the sub CPU 201 restores the value saved in step S1301 to each register. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

[Command analysis processing]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (command analysis process) performed in step S1103 of FIG. 22 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26.

In step S1401, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not a command has been received. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a receive command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1402. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that there is no reception command, the subroutine ends this subroutine.

In step S1402, the sub CPU 201 performs a read processing of the received command. In this process, the sub CPU 201 reads the command stored in the receive buffer. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1403.

In step S1403, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the receiving command is a large winning opening winning command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the reception command is a large winning opening winning command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1404. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the reception command is not the big winning opening winning command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1405.

In step S1404, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of updating the acquisition number counter and the total acquisition number counter during the jackpot. In this way, the sub CPU 201 can acquire data regarding the number of prize balls (the number of acquired game balls) acquired by the player by winning the game balls in the large winning opening 540. In addition, the acquisition number counter and the total acquisition number counter during the big hit start counting (counting) with the start of the big hit game as a delimiter. In this way, data on the number of prize balls is acquired each time a big hit or a small hit is made. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1405, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the reception command is a special symbol designation command. In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the receive command is a special symbol designation command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1406. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the reception command is not a special symbol designation command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1407.

In step S1406, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the stop symbol based on the special symbol designation command. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1407, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the reception command is a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command. In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the receive command is a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1408. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the reception command is not the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1409.

In step S1408, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the effect pattern based on the special figure variation pattern designation command, the stop symbol, and the extracted random value for effect determination. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1409, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the received command is a hit start command (big hit start command, small hit start command). In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a hit start command (big hit start command, small hit start command), the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1410. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not a hit start command (big hit start command, small hit start command), the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1411.

In step S1410, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the jackpot start effect. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1411, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the reception command is a large winning opening opening effect display command. In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the reception command is the effect display command during the opening of the big winning opening, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1412. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the reception command is not the effect display command during the opening of the big winning opening, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1413.

In step S1412, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the effect during the opening of the big winning opening. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1413, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the reception command is an inter-round display command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the receive command is an inter-round display command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1414. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the reception command is not an inter-round display command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1415.

In step S1414, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the effect between rounds. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1415, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the reception command is a hit end display command. In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the receive command is a hit end display command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1416. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the reception command is not a hit end display command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1417.

In step S1416, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the effect at the end of the big hit. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1417, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the reception command is a time saving end command. In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the receive command is a time saving end command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1418. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the reception command is not the time saving end command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1419.

In step S1418, the sub CPU 201 controls such as clearing the time saving flag and ending the time saving display. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1419, the sub CPU 201 performs processing corresponding to the other received command. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

[Ordinary electric accessory unit]
Hereinafter, the configuration of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 27 to 32.

The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 includes a base member 410, a front plate portion 420, a taxiway 430, a second starting port 440, a general winning opening 450, and an ordinary electric accessory 460.

The base member 410 shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, and 31 and 32 is a member that is the basis of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400. The base member 410 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and the plate surface thereof is arranged in the front-rear direction. Various members constituting the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 are attached to the base member 410.

The front plate portion 420 shown in FIGS. 27 to 30 is a member arranged at the front end portion of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400. The front plate portion 420 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and the plate surface thereof is arranged so as to face the front-rear direction. The front plate portion 420 is arranged so as to face the base member 410 in the front-rear direction and to be separated from the base member 410 in the front direction. In this way, a gap (hereinafter, referred to as "general utility space R1") is formed between the front plate portion 420 and the base member 410 to the extent that a game ball can enter. The common electric accessory space R1 is formed to have substantially the same shape and size as the front side plate portion 420 and the base member 410 when viewed from the front. The front plate portion 420 is attached to the base member 410 via screws or the like. The front plate portion 420 is formed of a transparent resin material so that the player can see the rear of the front plate portion 420.

The taxiway 430 shown in FIGS. 27 to 32 appropriately guides the moving game ball in a predetermined direction. The taxiway 430 is formed by a substantially plate-shaped member (wall portion) erected rearward from the front side plate portion 420. The taxiway 430 includes a first taxiway 431, a second taxiway 432, a third taxiway 433, a fourth taxiway 434 and a fifth taxiway 435.

The first taxiway 431 is arranged near the upper end of the utility space R1. The first taxiway 431 is formed in a substantially straight line extending from the right side to the left side while gently sloping. The first taxiway 431 is formed in the substantially central portion of the utility space R1 in the left-right direction. The left end portion of the first taxiway 431 is formed slightly to the left of the left and right central portions of the common electric accessory space R1. The right end portion of the first taxiway 431 is formed slightly to the right of the left and right central portions of the common electric accessory space R1. The first taxiway 431 configured in this way guides the moving game ball from right to left. The first taxiway 431 includes a deceleration rib 481.

The deceleration rib 481 reduces the moving speed of the game ball guided (moved) by the first taxiway 431 (deceleration means). The reduction rib 481 is composed of a rear projection 481a projecting forward from the base member 410 and a front projection 481b projecting rearward from the front plate portion 420. A plurality of rear projections 481a and front projections 481b are provided (two each in the present embodiment), and the rear projections 481a and the anterior projections 481b are provided at appropriate intervals along the extension direction (left-right direction) of the first taxiway 431. Be placed.

Due to such a configuration of the first taxiway 431, the game ball (moved by the first taxiway 431) moves while colliding with the rear projection 481a and the front projection 481b, so that the moving speed is reduced. It will be.

The second taxiway 432 is arranged in the vicinity of the lower left end portion of the utility space R1. The second taxiway 432 is formed in a substantially straight line extending from the right side to the left side while gently inclining. The second taxiway 432 is formed on the left side of the utility space R1. The left end of the second taxiway 432 is formed at the left end of the utility space R1. The right end of the second taxiway 432 is formed slightly to the left of the left and right central portions of the common electric accessory space R1. The second taxiway 432 configured in this way guides the moving game ball from right to left.

The third taxiway 433 is arranged substantially on the upper right side of the second taxiway 432 in the utility space R1. The third taxiway 433 is formed in a substantially curved shape extending from the left to the lower right while curving. The entrance of the third taxiway 433 is the upper left end of the third taxiway 433 and is formed between the left end of the first taxiway 431 and the right end of the second taxiway 432. The entrance of the third taxiway 433 is opened toward the upper left. The third taxiway 433 configured in this way guides the moving game ball to the lower right. The third taxiway 433 includes a guide portion 482.

The guide portion 482 is formed at the bottom of the third taxiway 433. The guide portion 482 is a plate-shaped member having a substantially triangular shape in a side view. The guide unit 482 is configured to be able to guide the game ball guided (moved) by the third taxiway 433 to the rear.

The fourth taxiway 434 is arranged at the right end of the universal utility space R1. The fourth taxiway 434 is formed in a substantially straight line extending from the upper right to the lower left while gently sloping. The fourth taxiway 434 is formed so as to extend from the upper end portion to the lower end portion of the utility space R1. The fourth taxiway 434 is formed so as to be adjacent to the first taxiway 431 on the left and right sides. The fourth taxiway 434 formed in this way guides the moving game ball to the lower left. The fourth taxiway 434 includes a deceleration rib 483.

The deceleration rib 483 reduces the moving speed of the game ball guided (moved) by the fourth taxiway 434 (deceleration means). The reduction rib 483 is composed of one rear projection 483a projecting forward from the base member 410 and two front projections 483b projecting rearward from the front plate portion 420. The rear projection 483a and the anterior projection 483b are each formed in a longitudinal shape extending in the left-right direction in a lateral view. In this way, the rear projection 483a and the anterior projection 483b are formed so as to be substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the fourth taxiway 434 in the front view. The rear projections 483a and the anterior projections 483b are arranged so as not to overlap each other in the front view (not to face each other in the front-rear direction but to be displaced in the vertical direction).

Due to such a configuration of the fourth taxiway 434, the game ball (moved by the fourth taxiway 434) moves while colliding with the rear protrusion 483a and the front protrusion 483b, so that the moving speed is reduced. It will be.

The fifth taxiway 435 is arranged below the first taxiway 431 in the utility space R1. The fifth taxiway 435 is formed in a substantially straight line extending from above to below. The upper side of the fifth taxiway 435 is covered with a wall portion forming the first taxiway 431. The entrance of the fifth taxiway 435 is formed at the upper right end of the fifth taxiway 435 (the upper end of the left wall forming the fourth taxiway 434). The entrance of the fifth taxiway 435 is opened toward the right side (fourth taxiway 434 side). The fifth taxiway 435 configured in this way guides the moving game ball from above to below. The fifth taxiway 435 includes a guide 484.

The guide 484 is formed at the bottom of the fifth taxiway 435. The guide 484 is a plate-shaped member having a substantially triangular shape in a side view. The guide 484 is configured to be able to guide the game ball guided (moved) by the fifth taxiway 435 to the rear.

The second starting port 440 shown in FIGS. 28 and 31 is formed by penetrating the base member 410 in the front-rear direction. The second starting port 440 is formed behind the lowermost portion of the fifth taxiway 435 (behind the guide 484). The second starting port 440 includes a second starting port switch 441. The second start port switch 441 is arranged near the lowermost part of the fifth taxiway 435 (immediately above the fifth taxiway 435).

The general winning opening 450 shown in FIGS. 28 and 31 is formed by penetrating the base member 410 in the front-rear direction. The general winning opening 450 is formed behind the lowermost portion of the third taxiway 433 (behind the guide portion 482). The general winning opening 450 includes a general winning opening switch 451 (see FIG. 5).

The ordinary electric accessory 460 shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, and FIGS. 31 and 32 includes a blade member 461 and a start port solenoid 462.

The blade member 461 is a member formed in a blade shape. The blade member 461 is rotatably supported by the base member 410 and the front plate portion 420 via a rotation shaft 463 protruding in the front-rear direction. The blade member 461 is arranged at the entrance of the fifth taxiway 435. In this way, the blade member 461 can open and close the entrance of the fifth taxiway 435. When the blade member 461 opens the entrance of the fifth taxiway 435, the tip end side of the blade member 461 enters the fourth taxiway 434. In this way, when the blade member 461 opens the entrance of the fifth taxiway 435, a part of the game ball guided by the fourth taxiway 434 is guided into the fifth taxiway 435.

The start port solenoid 462 drives the blade member 461. The start port solenoid 462 is arranged behind the base member 410. The start port solenoid 462 is configured to be able to transmit a driving force to the blade member 461 via a gear or the like (not shown).

In this way, the ordinary electric accessory 460 is configured so that the entrance of the fifth taxiway 435 can be opened and closed by driving the blade member 461 by the starting port solenoid 462. Then, when the blade member 461 is opened, a part of the game ball guided by the fourth taxiway 434 is guided into the fifth taxiway 435, and it is easy to pass through the second starting port 440. (Open state). Further, when the blade member 461 is closed, the game ball guided by the fourth taxiway 434 is not guided into the fifth taxiway 435. That is, it is in a state where it is difficult to pass through the second starting port 440 (closed state).

In the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 having such a configuration, the moving game ball is appropriately guided in a predetermined direction by the guide path 430.
A description of the rolling mode of the game ball in the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 will be described later.

[Attacker unit]
Hereinafter, the configuration of the attacker unit 500 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 33 to 44.

The attacker unit 500 includes a base member 510, a front plate portion 520, a taxiway 530, a large winning opening 540, a rear case 550, and a special electric accessory 600.

The base members 510 shown in FIGS. 33 to 38, and 40 and 41 are the members that form the basis of the attacker unit 500. The base member 510 is formed in an elongated substantially flat plate shape. The base member 510 is arranged so that its longitudinal direction is directed to the left-right direction and its plate surface is directed to the front-rear direction. Various members constituting the attacker unit 500 are attached to the base member 510. A slit 511 is formed in the base member 510.

The slit 511 is formed so as to penetrate the base member 510 in the front-rear direction. The slit 511 is formed on the upper portion of the base member 510 in a substantially straight line extending from the right side to the left side while being gently inclined in a front view. A shutter 610 (more specifically, an induction portion 611 of the shutter 610), which will be described later, is arranged in the slit 511.

The front plate portion 520 shown in FIGS. 33 to 37 and 39 is a member arranged at the front end portion of the attacker unit 500. The front plate portion 520 is formed to have substantially the same shape and size as the base member 510. The front plate portion 520 is arranged with its plate surface facing the front-rear direction. The front plate portion 520 is arranged so as to face the base member 510 in the front-rear direction and to be separated from the base member 510 in the front direction. In this way, a gap (hereinafter, referred to as "special electric accessory space R2") is formed between the front plate portion 520 and the base member 510 so that the game ball can enter. The special electric accessory space R2 is formed to have substantially the same shape and size as the front plate portion 520 and the base member 510 when viewed from the front. The front plate portion 520 is attached to the base member 510 via screws or the like. The front plate portion 520 is formed of a transparent resin material so that the player can see the rear of the front plate portion 520.

The taxiway 530 shown in FIGS. 33 and 35 to 41 appropriately guides the moving game ball in a predetermined direction. The taxiway 530 is formed by a shutter 610 and a substantially plate-shaped member (wall portion) erected rearward from the front plate portion 520. The taxiway 530 includes a first taxiway 531 and a second taxiway 532 and a third taxiway 533.

As described above, the taxiway 530 (more specifically, the first taxiway 531) is formed by the shutter 610. Here, as will be described later, the shutter 610 is configured to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction with respect to the base member 510 via the slit 511. In such a configuration of the shutter 610, the first taxiway 531 is formed when the shutter 610 advances forward with respect to the base member 510. Therefore, for the sake of convenience, the shutter 610 will be described below assuming that the shutter 610 is advanced forward with respect to the base member 510 (a state in which the first taxiway 531 is formed).

The first taxiway 531 is arranged near the upper end portion of the special electric accessory space R2. The first taxiway 531 is formed in a substantially straight line extending from the right side to the left side while gently sloping. The length of the first taxiway 531 in the left-right direction (longitudinal direction) is formed to be slightly shorter than that of the base member 510. The left end portion of the first taxiway 531 is formed in the vicinity of the left end portion of the special electric accessory space R2. The right end portion of the first taxiway 531 is formed in the vicinity of the right end portion of the special electric accessory space R2. The first taxiway 531 configured in this way guides the moving game ball from right to left. The first taxiway 531 includes a deceleration rib 534.

The deceleration rib 534 reduces the moving speed of the game ball guided (moved) by the first taxiway 531 (deceleration means). The reduction rib 534 is composed of a plurality of rear projections 534a projecting forward from the base member 510, and a plurality of front projections 534b projecting rearward from the front plate portion 520. In this embodiment, six rear protrusions 534a are provided. Further, five front projections 534b are provided. The plurality of rear projections 534a and front projections 534b are arranged at appropriate intervals along the extending direction (left-right direction) of the first taxiway 531. The appropriate interval is set to be at least longer than the diameter of the game ball. Further, these plurality of rear projections 534a and front projections 534b are arranged so as not to overlap each other in the front view (so as not to face each other in the front-rear direction but to be displaced in the left-right direction).

With such a configuration of the first taxiway 531, the game ball (moved by the first taxiway 531) has a rear projection 534a and an anterior projection 534b as shown in FIGS. 45 (a) and 45 (b). Since it moves in a zigzag shape in a plan view while colliding with (because the smooth movement of the game ball is restricted), the moving speed is reduced.

When the moving speed of the game balls moved by the first taxiway 531 is reduced in this way, as shown in FIG. 45 (c), a plurality of game balls are moving on the first taxiway 531. You can create a situation. In this way, when a plurality of game balls are moving on the first taxiway 531, the plurality of game balls are guided to the third taxiway 533 only by opening the shutter 610 once. However, it is possible to win a prize in the large prize opening 540. That is, the round digestion in the jackpot game can be performed quickly.
Further, even if the opening time of the shutter 610 is short, if many game balls are retained on the shutter 610, many prizes can be generated.
In addition, since many game balls can be won at one time, it is easy to generate more prizes (so-called over prizes) than the number of prizes that can be won in one round of the jackpot game.

The second taxiway 532 is arranged immediately to the right of the first taxiway 531 in the special electric accessory space R2. The second taxiway 532 is formed in a substantially straight line extending from the right side to the left side while gently inclining. The inclination angle of the second taxiway 532 is formed to be substantially the same as the inclination angle of the first taxiway 531. In this way, the second taxiway 532, together with the first taxiway 531 is configured as one substantially linear taxiway that gently slopes from right to left. The second taxiway 532 configured in this way guides the moving game ball from the right side to the left side (first taxiway 531 side).

The third taxiway 533 is arranged in the substantially central portion of the special electric accessory space R2 in the vertical direction. The third taxiway 533 is formed in a substantially straight line extending from the right side to the left side while gently inclining. The third taxiway 533 is arranged below the first taxiway 531. The third taxiway 533 is formed to have substantially the same shape and size as the first taxiway 531 when viewed from the front.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41 and the like, a wall portion connected to the third taxiway 533 is arranged between the left end of the third taxiway 533 and the left end of the first taxiway 531. Further, a wall portion connected to the third taxiway 533 is arranged between the right end of the third taxiway 533 and the right end of the second taxiway 532. In this way, the third taxiway 533 is formed in a concave shape when viewed from the front.

The third taxiway 533 configured in this way guides the moving game ball from the right side to the left side (the large winning opening 540 side). The third taxiway 533 includes a guide portion 535.

The guide portion 535 is formed at the lowermost portion of the third taxiway 533. The guide portion 535 is a plate-shaped member having a substantially triangular shape in a plan view. The guide unit 535 is configured to be able to guide the game ball guided (moved) by the third taxiway 533 backward.

The large winning opening 540 shown in FIGS. 37, 38, 40 and 41 is formed by the base member 510 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The grand prize opening 540 is formed behind the lowermost part of the third taxiway 533 (behind the guide portion 535). The large winning opening 540 includes a count switch 541. As shown in FIG. 37, the count switch 541 is arranged below the rear of the large winning opening 540.

The rear case 550 shown in FIGS. 33, 35 to 37, 41, 43, and 44 includes various members (shutter 610, large winning opening solenoid 620, link arm 630, etc.) constituting the special electric accessory 600. ) Is housed. The rear case 550 is formed in a substantially rectangular hollow substantially box shape in a plan view. As shown in FIG. 43, in the rear case 550, the upper space and the lower space are partitioned by a substantially flat plate-shaped mounting portion 551 formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view. That is, the rear case 550 is formed in a double-decker structure by the mounting portion 551, and predetermined members are arranged in the upper space and the lower space, respectively. Specifically, a shutter 610, a link arm 630, and the like are arranged in the upper space. Further, in the space on the lower side, a large winning opening solenoid 620 and the like are arranged. The rear case 550 is attached to the rear side surface of the base member 510 via screws or the like. The inside and the outside of the rear case 550 (in front of the base member 510) are communicated with each other through the slit 511.

The special electric accessory 600 shown in FIGS. 33, 35 to 38, and 40 to 44 includes a shutter 610, a large winning opening solenoid 620, and a link arm 630.

As shown in FIG. 42 (c), the shutter 610 includes a guide portion 611, a connection portion 612, and a rotation shaft 613.

The guide portion 611 is a member that forms the first taxiway 531. The guide portion 611 is formed in an elongated substantially flat plate shape. The guide portion 611 is arranged so that the plate surface thereof is directed in the vertical direction and the longitudinal direction is directed in the horizontal direction. The length of the guide portion 611 in the left-right direction is formed to be substantially the same as the slit 511 formed in the base member 510. The length of the induction unit 611 (more specifically, the portion of the induction unit 611 that can advance into the special electric accessory space R2) in the front-rear direction (see L1 shown in FIG. 45 (a)) is the special electric accessory space. It is formed so as to be shorter than the length of R2 in the front-rear direction by a predetermined length (see L2 shown in FIG. 45A). That is, even when the guide portion 611 advances into the special electric accessory space R2, a gap having a predetermined length is formed between the front end portion of the guide portion 611 and the rear side surface of the front side plate portion 520. NS. In the present embodiment, the gap between the front end portion of the guide portion 611 and the rear side surface of the front side plate portion 520 is set to be shorter than the radius of the game ball.

The connecting portion 612 is a member that connects the guiding portion 611 and the rotation shaft 613 described later. The connecting portion 612 is formed in a substantially rectangular flat plate shape in a plan view. The connecting portion 612 is formed so as to extend rearward from the central portion in the left-right direction of the guiding portion 611.

The rotation shaft 613 is a member that receives the transmitted driving force. The rotating shaft 613 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with the axial direction directed in the vertical direction. The rotating shaft 613 projects upward from the vicinity of the rear end portion of the connecting portion 612.

In this way, the shutter 610 is formed as a substantially convex shape in which the central portion in the left-right direction is convex rearward in a plan view. The shutter 610 is housed in the rear case 550 with the guide portion 611 inserted into the slit 511. As shown in FIG. 43 and the like, the shutter 610 is mounted on the mounting portion 551 in the rear case 550 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. In the following, the position where the shutter 610 moves (displaces) most rearward with respect to the mounting portion 551 is referred to as the first position, and the shutter 610 moves (displaces) most forward with respect to the mounting portion 551. The position is referred to as a second position.

The winning opening solenoid 620 drives the shutter 610. The grand prize opening solenoid 620 is housed in the rear case 550. More specifically, the grand prize opening solenoid 620 is arranged in the space below the mounting portion 551 in the rear case 550. The grand prize opening solenoid 620 is arranged parallel to the longitudinal direction (left-right direction) of the shutter 610. As shown in FIG. 42 (a), the large winning opening solenoid 620 includes a coil portion 621, a case 622, a plunger 623, a spring 624, and a transmission portion 625.

The coil portion 621 is a hollow cylindrical member around which an electric wire is wound. The coil portion 621 is configured to be energized. Further, the coil portion 621 is configured to be able to switch between an excited state when energized and a non-excited state when the energized state is released. When the coil portion 621 is in the excited state, it can generate a magnetic field inside and draw in the plunger 623.

The case 622 is a member that houses the coil portion 621. The case 622 is formed in the shape of a hollow substantially box with an open upper portion. A hole 626 penetrating in the left-right direction is formed on the right side of the case 622.

The plunger 623 is a substantially columnar member. The plunger 623 is arranged so that the axial direction is directed to the left-right direction. One side (left side) end of the plunger 623 is inserted into the coil portion 621 through the hole 626 of the case 622. The plunger 623 has a protruding position in which the other side (right side) end is separated from the coil portion 621 and a non-protruding position close to the coil portion 621 according to the excited state or the non-excited state of the coil portion 621. The position and the position can be displaced. The other end of the plunger 623 is formed in a flange shape.

The spring 624 is a member that urges the plunger 623 toward the protruding position side. The spring 624 is arranged between the case 622 and the transmission unit 625, which will be described later, in a state of being inserted through the plunger 623. The spring 624 always urges the transmission portion 625 in a direction (to the right) away from the case 622.

The transmission unit 625 is a member that transmits the driving force generated by the large winning opening solenoid 620. The transmission unit 625 is formed in a substantially box shape in a plan view. The transmission portion 625 is connected to the plunger 623 via a flange-shaped portion formed at the other side (left side) end of the plunger 623. In the transmission portion 625, an insertion hole 627 penetrating in the vertical direction is formed in the central portion in a plan view. The insertion hole 627 is formed in the shape of an elongated hole with the longitudinal direction directed in the front-rear direction in a plan view.

In the large winning opening solenoid 620 having such a configuration, when the coil portion 621 is in the non-excited state, the plunger 623 (and thus the transmission portion 625) is urged to the right by the spring 624 and is arranged at the protruding position. .. Further, when the coil portion 621 is switched from the non-excited state to the excited state, the plunger 623 (and thus the transmission portion 625) is pulled into the coil portion 621 (moves to the left) against the urging force of the spring 624. Then) it is placed in a non-protruding position. As described above, in the large winning opening solenoid 620, when the coil portion 621 is switched between the non-excited state and the excited state, the transmission portion 625 is displaced to generate a driving force.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the large winning opening solenoid 620 appropriately switches the position of the plunger 623 between the protruding position and the non-protruding position in order to generate a driving force. That is, the large winning opening solenoid 620 appropriately displaces the plunger 623 in the left-right direction in order to generate a driving force.

The link arm 630 is a member that transmits the driving force generated by the large winning opening solenoid 620 to the shutter 610. That is, the link arm 630 is a member that constitutes the link mechanism. As shown in FIG. 42B, the link arm 630 is formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view. A one-side through hole 631 penetrating in the vertical direction is formed at one side end of the link arm 630. The one-side through hole 631 is formed in a substantially elongated hole shape with the longitudinal direction directed to the left-right direction in a plan view. At the other end of the link arm 630, a downwardly protruding other side rotation shaft 632 is formed. A central rotation shaft 633 protruding in the vertical direction is formed between the one-side through hole 631 of the link arm 630 and the other-side rotation shaft 632.

The link arm 630 having such a configuration is rotatably supported in the rear case 550 via the central rotation shaft 633. In this way, the link arm 630 is configured to be rotatable around the central rotation shaft 633 in a clockwise direction in a plan view or a counterclockwise direction in a plan view. Further, the rotation shaft 613 of the shutter 610 is inserted into the one-side through hole 631 of the link arm 630 from below. Further, the other side rotation shaft 632 of the link arm 630 is inserted from above into the insertion hole 627 formed in the transmission portion 625 of the large winning opening solenoid 620.

In the special electric accessory 600 having such a configuration, the driving force generated by the large winning opening solenoid 620 can be transmitted to the shutter 610 via the link arm 630.

Specifically, when the plunger 623 of the large winning opening solenoid 620 shown in FIG. 43 is switched from the protruding position (the shutter 610 is retracted rearward with respect to the base member 510) to the non-protruding position, the plunger 623 Moves to the left. When the plunger 623 moves to the left, the link arm 630 rotates clockwise in a plan view about the central rotation shaft 633 via the transmission unit 625. When the link arm 630 rotates clockwise in a plan view, the shutter 610 moves backward from the second position to the first position as shown in FIG. 44.

In this way, when the shutter 610 retracts rearward with respect to the base member 510, the shutter 610 (more specifically, the guide portion 611) is arranged in the rear case 550 (arranged in the first position). When the guide portion 611 of the shutter 610 is arranged in the rear case 550, the first taxiway 531 is not formed, so that the game ball can easily enter the third taxiway 533 (and by extension, the grand prize opening 540). It becomes a state.

On the other hand, when the plunger 623 of the large winning opening solenoid 620 shown in FIG. 44 is switched from the non-protruding position (the state in which the shutter 610 advances forward with respect to the base member 510) to the protruding position, the plunger 623 Moves to the right. When the plunger 623 moves to the right, the link arm 630 rotates counterclockwise in a plan view about the central rotation shaft 633 via the transmission unit 625. When the link arm 630 rotates counterclockwise in a plan view, the shutter 610 moves forward from the first position to the second position.

In this way, when the shutter 610 advances forward with respect to the base member 510, the shutter 610 (more specifically, the guide portion 611) is arranged in the special electric accessory space R2 (arranged at the second position). .. When the guide portion 611 of the shutter 610 is arranged in the special electric accessory space R2, the first taxiway 531 is formed, so that the game ball can enter the third taxiway 533 (and by extension, the grand prize opening 540). It will be a difficult situation.

As described above, in the special electric accessory 600, the large winning opening solenoid 620 is in a direction different from the direction in which the shutter 610 moves from the first position to the second position (that is, the front-rear direction) (that is, the left-right direction). ) Generate driving force. Further, the direction of the driving force (left-right direction) generated by the large winning opening solenoid 620 is converted into the direction (front-back direction) in which the shutter 610 moves by the link arm 630.

As a result, the direction in which the large winning opening solenoid 620 is driven is set to a direction (left-right direction) different from the direction in which the shutter 610 moves (front-back direction), so that the depth of the attacker unit 500 can be narrowed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the length in the front-rear direction of the guide portion 611 of the shutter 610 (more specifically, the portion of the guide portion 611 that can advance into the special electric accessory space R2) is the special electric accessory space R2. It is formed so as to be shorter than the length in the anteroposterior direction of. In this way, the moving distance (that is, the moving distance in the front-rear direction) when the shutter 610 moves between the first position and the second position can be shortened, so that the depth of the attacker unit 500 can be narrowed. can.

Further, in the present embodiment, the link arm 630 is clockwise or flat in a plan view around the central rotation axis 633 according to the switching of the position of the plunger 623 (non-protruding position or protruding position) in the large winning opening solenoid 620. It is rotated counterclockwise. Therefore, for example, the position of the rear end portion of the link arm 630 is changed according to the switching of the position of the plunger 623.

Specifically, when the plunger 623 is switched to the protruding position (that is, when the shutter 610 is in the second position), the position of the rear end portion of the link arm 630 is the central rotation axis of the link arm 630. It becomes a portion near 633 (see B10 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, for example, when the plunger 623 is switched to the non-protruding position (that is, when the shutter 610 is the first position), the position of the rear end portion of the link arm 630 is one side of the link arm 630. It becomes a portion in the vicinity of the through hole 631 (see B20 in FIG. 44).

In such a configuration, the position of the rear end portion of the large winning opening solenoid 620 (B30 shown in FIGS. 43B and 44B) is after the link arm 630 regardless of the switching of the position of the plunger 623. It is located in front of the position of the end (see FIGS. 43 (b) and 44 (b)). That is, the rear end portion of the large winning opening solenoid 620 is arranged in front (front side) of the rear end portion (rear end portion of the gaming machine) of the link arm 630. In this way, the attacker unit 500 is compactly formed in the depth direction.

A magnetic detector 700 for preventing fraud using a magnet is arranged behind the attacker unit 500 (more specifically, behind the left portion of the rear case 550) (FIG. 43 and FIG. 43). See FIG. 44). As described above, in the present embodiment, since the attacker unit 500 is compactly formed in the depth direction, a space for arranging other game parts is provided behind the attacker unit 500.

In the attacker unit 500 having such a configuration, the moving game ball is appropriately guided in a predetermined direction by the guide path 530.
A description of the rolling mode of the game ball in the attacker unit 500 will be described later.

Hereinafter, the rolling mode of the game ball in the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 and the attacker unit 500 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 46 to 51.

First, with reference to FIG. 46, the mutual arrangement relationship between the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 and the attacker unit 500 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 46, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged above the attacker unit 500. The left end of the second taxiway 432 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged to the right of the left end of the first taxiway 531 of the attacker unit 500 in the left-right direction. That is, the game ball guided by the second taxiway 432 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is released from the second taxiway 432 and then falls (rolls) into the first taxiway 531 of the attacker unit 500. can do.

Further, in the extending direction (lower left) of the fourth taxiway 434 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400, the right end portions of the second taxiway 532 and the first taxiway 531 of the attacker unit 500 are arranged. That is, the game ball guided by the fourth taxiway 434 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is released from the fourth taxiway 434 and then of the second taxiway 532 or the first taxiway 531 of the attacker unit 500. It can fall to the right end.

In the following, the rolling mode of the game ball in the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 and the attacker unit 500 will be described by specifically exemplifying the game ball rolling in the game area 20.

In FIG. 47, three game balls (game ball Pa1, game ball Pb1 and game ball Pc1) are illustrated as game balls that roll in the game area 20.
First, among the three game balls, the rolling mode of the game ball Pa1 will be described below.

The game ball Pa1 has fallen (rolled) to the center in the left-right direction of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400. As shown in FIG. 48A, such a game ball Pa1 falls on the first taxiway 431 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400. The game ball Pa1 that has fallen on the first taxiway 431 is guided (rolled) to the lower left by the first taxiway 431 (see the game ball Pa2 shown in FIG. 48 (a)).

The game ball Pa2 shown in FIG. 48A is guided to the lower left by the first taxiway 431 and then discharged to the outside of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400. In this way, the game ball Pa2 released to the outside of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 either falls to the lower left as it is (see the game ball Pa3 shown in FIG. 47), or collides with the nearest game nail 68 to the right. It is rolled downward (see the game ball PA3 shown in FIG. 47).

In this way, when the game ball PA3 shown in FIG. 47 is rolled to the lower right, it is guided to the third taxiway 433 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400. In this way, the game ball PA3 guided to the third taxiway 433 is guided to the lower right by the third taxiway 433 and wins a prize in the general winning opening 450 (see the game ball PA4 shown in FIG. 48 (b)). ..

On the other hand, when the game ball Pa3 shown in FIG. 47 falls to the lower left as it is, it is guided to the second taxiway 432 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400. In this way, the game ball Pa3 guided to the second taxiway 432 is guided (rolled) to the lower left by the second taxiway 432 and is discharged to the outside of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 (FIG. 48). (B) and the game ball Pa4 shown in FIG. 49).

In this way, the game ball Pa4 released to the outside of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is an attacker when the shutter 610 is arranged at the second position (when the first taxiway 531 is formed). It falls on the first taxiway 531 of the unit 500 (see the game ball Pa5 shown in FIG. 50 (a)). On the other hand, in the attacker unit 500, when the shutter 610 is arranged at the first position (when the first taxiway 531 is not formed), it is on the third taxiway 533 of the attacker unit 500. It falls (see the game ball Pa5 shown in FIG. 50 (b)).

As described above, the game ball that has fallen on the first taxiway 431 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 passes through the second taxiway 432 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 to the first taxiway 531 or the first taxiway 531 of the attacker unit 500. It can roll to the three taxiways 533, and can win a prize in the large winning opening 540 according to the timing of movement of the shutter 610.

Next, among the three game balls, the rolling mode of the game ball Pb1 and the game ball Pc1 will be described.

The game ball Pb1 and the game ball Pc1 shown in FIG. 47 are falling (rolling) toward the right side of the normal electric accessory unit 400. In this way, the game ball Pb1 and the game ball Pc1 that fall to the right side of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 enter the fourth taxiway 434 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400.

Of the game balls that have entered the fourth taxiway 434, the game ball Pb1 that is falling on the left side of the fourth taxiway 434 is said to be the case when the blade member 461 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened. The blade member 461 guides the taxiway to the fifth taxiway 435 (see the game ball Pb2 shown in FIG. 48 (a)). In this way, the game ball Pb2 guided to the fifth taxiway 435 wins a prize at the second starting port 440. Further, the game ball Pb1 falling on the left side of the fourth taxiway 434 remains as it is (without being guided to the fifth taxiway 435) when the blade member 461 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is closed. It falls in the fourth taxiway 434 (see the game ball Pb2 shown in FIG. 48 (b)).

Further, the game ball Pc1 falling on the right side of the fourth taxiway 434 is guided to the lower left by the fourth taxiway 434, and is guided to the fourth taxiway as it is without being guided to another taxiway. It falls in the taxiway 434 (see the game ball Pc2 shown in FIGS. 48 (a) and 49). In this way, when the game ball Pc2 that has fallen in the fourth taxiway 434 is released to the outside of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400, it falls on the second taxiway 532 of the attacker unit 500. The game ball Pc2 that has fallen on the second taxiway 532 is guided to the lower left by the second taxiway 532 (see the game ball Pc3 shown in FIG. 50).

In this way, the game ball Pc3 guided to the lower left by the second taxiway 532 is the second taxiway when the shutter 610 is arranged at the second position (when the first taxiway 531 is formed). It is guided to the first taxiway 531 via the road 532. Then, the game ball Pc3 is guided to the lower left by the first taxiway 531.

Further, the game ball Pc3 guided to the lower left by the second taxiway 532 is the case where the shutter 610 is arranged at the first position (when the first taxiway 531 is not formed) or the first taxiway. If the shutter 610 moves to the second position while being guided by the taxiway 531, it falls on the third taxiway 533 (see the game ball Pc4 shown in FIG. 50 (b)).

In this way, the game ball that has fallen in the fourth taxiway 434 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 goes to the first taxiway 531 or the third taxiway 533 via the second taxiway 532 of the attacker unit 500. It can be rolled and can win a prize in the large winning opening 540 according to the timing of movement of the shutter 610.

Here, in the present embodiment, as the route of the game ball guided to the first taxiway 531 of the attacker unit 500, as described above, it is guided via the second taxiway 432 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400. The route (hereinafter referred to as "first route"), the route guided via the second taxiway 532 of the attacker unit 500 (hereinafter referred to as "second route"), and Is provided.

In this way, since the game ball can be guided to the first taxiway 531 (and thus the third taxiway 533) of the attacker unit 500 by two routes, more game balls than when there is only one route. Can be won in the large prize opening 540 in a short period of time. That is, many game balls can be won (passed) at one time for the large winning opening 540 without providing a dedicated driving means. As a result, round digestion in the jackpot game can be performed quickly.

Further, since there are two routes of the game ball that are guided to the first taxiway 531 of the attacker unit 500, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), they are guided to the first taxiway 531 by different routes. The game balls may collide with each other. In such a case, since the game ball from the first route (see the game ball Pa5 shown in FIG. 51 (a)) falls from above, the game ball from the second route (see FIG. 51 (a)). Guidance to the lower left of the game ball Pc3 shown) may be hindered. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 51 (b), the game ball Pa5 that has fallen from above collides with the game ball Pc3 that is guided to the lower left, and moves to the upper right of the first taxiway 531. (See the game ball Pc4 shown in FIG. 50 (b)).

As described above, the second taxiway 432 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is formed at a position where the released game ball can collide with the rolling game ball on the first taxiway 531 of the attacker unit 500. Further, the second taxiway 432 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 collides the released game ball with the game ball rolling on the first taxiway 531 of the attacker unit 500, and rolls the first taxiway 531. The game ball can be temporarily backflowed (it can be moved upward to the right).

In this way, when the game ball Pc3 moves to the upper right of the first taxiway 531, the moving speed of the game ball guided (moved) by the first taxiway 531 can be further reduced, and eventually the first taxiway. It becomes easy to create a situation in which a plurality of game balls are moving on the 531. That is, since it is easy to create a situation in which a plurality of game balls are moving on the first taxiway 531, many game balls can be won at once for the large winning opening 540 without providing a dedicated driving means. Can be done. As a result, round digestion in the jackpot game can be performed quickly.

The large winning opening 540 according to this embodiment is an embodiment of the passing area.
Further, the shutter 610 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the displacement member.
Further, the large winning opening solenoid 620 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the driving means.
Further, the deceleration rib 534 and the first taxiway 531 according to the present embodiment are one embodiment of the deceleration means.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be, for example, a pachislot gaming machine.

Further, in the present embodiment, the large winning opening 540 is illustrated as an example of the passing area, but the present invention is not limited to this.

Further, in the present embodiment, the shutter 610 has been illustrated as an example of the displacement member, but the present invention is not limited to this.

Further, in the present embodiment, the deceleration rib 534 and the first taxiway 531 are illustrated as examples of the deceleration means, but it is possible to have a configuration different from these.
Hereinafter, the first taxiway 531 of the attacker unit 500 according to another example will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53.

In the first taxiway 531 of the attacker unit 500 according to another example, the difference from the above-described configuration is that the gap between the front end portion of the guide portion 611 and the rear side surface of the front side plate portion 520 is formed in the game ball. It is formed so as to be longer than the radius and shorter than the diameter.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 52A and 52B, the game ball rolling on the first taxiway 531 has a front end portion of the guidance portion 611 and a rear side surface of the front side plate portion 520. The first taxiway 531 is rolled in a state in which a part of the taxiway is fitted in the gap between the taxiways (a part of the taxiway is depressed below the upper surface of the guide portion 611). In this way, the game ball can lengthen the flow path. Further, when the game ball rolls on the first taxiway 531, it rolls while contacting the rear side surface of the front plate portion 520. In this way, since the game ball rolls while in contact with other members, the moving speed of the game ball can be effectively reduced.

Further, the game ball collides with the front projection 534b formed on the front plate portion 520 when rolling on the first taxiway 531. In this way, when the game ball rolls beyond the collision front protrusion 534b, as shown in FIG. 53A, the game ball moves in a direction away from the front plate portion 520 in order to avoid the front protrusion 534b. .. Here, since a part of the game ball is in a state of being lowered below the upper surface of the guide portion 611, it is necessary to temporarily eliminate the depressed state in order to move in a direction away from the front plate portion 520. There is. That is, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), the game ball consumes energy in order to increase the height from the depressed state, and the moving speed is effectively reduced.

By appropriately setting the gap between the front end portion of the guide portion 611 and the rear side surface of the front side plate portion 520, the moving speed of the game ball can be made desired.

[Structure of the second movable accessory unit 82]
Hereinafter, the schematic configuration of the second movable accessory unit 82 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 59.

The second movable accessory unit 82 gives a visual impression (impact) to the player by operating at an appropriate timing. The second movable accessory unit 82 mainly includes a base member 1500, a first movable body 1600, a second movable body 1700, and a movement control means 1800.

The base member 1500 is provided with a first movable body 1600, a second movable body 1700, and a movement control means 1800. The first movable body 1600 is arranged in front of the base member 1500, and the second movable body 1700 is arranged behind the base member 1500. The movement control means 1800 can appropriately move the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 with respect to the base member 1500. Specifically, the movement control means 1800 can move the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 to a standby position (see FIG. 54) or an effect position (see FIG. 69) described later. By moving the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 at appropriate timings, it is possible to give a visual impression to the player.

Hereinafter, the configuration of each member of the second movable accessory unit 82 will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 74.

[Structure of base member 1500]
The base member 1500 shown in FIGS. 54 to 59 supports each member constituting the second movable accessory unit 82. The base member 1500 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The base member 1500 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a front view with the longitudinal direction directed to the left and right. The base member 1500 mainly comprises an opening 1510, a sliding rod 1520 and an arcuate hole 1530.

The opening 1510 is a portion formed so as to penetrate the base member 1500 in the front-rear direction. The opening 1510 is formed in the lower left and right center of the base member 1500. Specifically, the opening 1510 is formed so as to cut out from the lower end portion to the upper and lower substantially central portions in the left and right central portions of the base member 1500. The opening 1510 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view.

The sliding rod 1520 (see FIG. 56) guides the first movable body 1600. A pair of left and right sliding rods 1520 are provided at the left and right center portions of the base member 1500. The sliding rod 1520 is formed in a substantially columnar shape. The sliding rod 1520 is arranged with its axial direction oriented in the vertical direction. The sliding rods 1520 are arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 1510 in the front view. The sliding rod 1520 (more specifically, the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the sliding rod 1520) is appropriately fixed to the front side surface of the base member 210.

The arc-shaped hole 1530 penetrates the base member 1500 in the front-rear direction. The arc-shaped holes 1530 are formed in the vicinity of the left and right ends of the base member 1500, respectively. The arc-shaped hole 1530 is formed in an arc shape centered on a rotation shaft 1750, which will be described later, in a front view.

[Structure of the first movable body 1600]
The first movable body 1600 shown in FIGS. 54, 55, 58, 60 and 61 is supported so as to be movable in the vertical direction with respect to the base member 1500, and a part of the first movable body 1600 itself is supported. It is also possible to move (rotate). The first movable body 1600 is arranged in front of the base member 1500 by being attached to one surface side (front side) of the base member 1500. The first movable body 1600 mainly includes a base member 1610, a movable body 1620, a movement control means 1630, and a cover member 1640.

The base member 1610 shown in FIG. 55 supports each member constituting the first movable body 1600. The base member 1610 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The base member 1610 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a front view with the longitudinal direction directed to the left and right. The base member 1610 is arranged in front of the left and right central portions (sliding rods 1520) of the base member 1500. The base member 1610 is connected to the sliding rod 1520 so as to be slidable. As a result, the base member 1610 is guided by the sliding rod 1520 so as to be movable along the axial direction (that is, the vertical direction) of the sliding rod 1520. The base member 1610 mainly includes a through hole 1611 and a connecting shaft 1612.

The through hole 1611 penetrates the base member 1610 in the front-rear direction. Through holes 1611 are formed on the right side and the left side of the center of the left and right sides of the base member 1610 (a pair of left and right sides), respectively.

The connecting shaft 1612 is a substantially columnar member. The connecting shaft 1612 is arranged so that the axial direction is directed to the front-rear direction. The connecting shaft 1612 is provided at both left and right ends of the base member 1610, respectively. The rear end portion of the connecting shaft 1612 is fixed in a state of being inserted into the right end portion and the left end portion of the base member 1610, respectively.

The movable body 1620 shown in FIGS. 54, 60 and 61 is movably supported with respect to the base member 1610. A pair of left and right movable bodies 1620 are provided with respect to the base member 1610. The left and right movable bodies 1620 are formed substantially symmetrically. Therefore, in the following, the configuration of the movable body 1620 on the right side will be specifically described, and the description of the configuration of the movable body 1620 on the left side will be omitted as appropriate. The movable body 1620 mainly includes a base member 1621, a substrate 1622, a light diffusing member 1623, a cover member 1624, and a rotating shaft 1625.

The base member 1621 shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 supports each member constituting the first movable body 1600. The base member 1621 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The base member 1621 is formed so that the longitudinal direction is substantially left-right and the right end is sharpened. The base member 1621 mainly includes a cylindrical portion 1621a and an elongated hole 1621b.

The cylindrical portion 1621a is a portion formed in a cylindrical shape with the axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The cylindrical portion 1621a is formed in the vicinity of the left end portion of the base member 1621.

The elongated hole 1621b penetrates the base member 1621 in the front-rear direction. The elongated hole 1621b is formed in the vicinity of the left end portion of the base member 1621 (immediately to the right of the cylindrical portion 1621a). The elongated hole 1621b is formed so as to extend linearly from the vicinity of the cylindrical portion 1621a toward the right side (the right end side of the base member 1610) by a predetermined distance.

The substrate 1622 shown in FIG. 61 is for mounting electronic components (functional components). The substrate 1622 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The outer shape of the substrate 1622 is formed to be one size smaller than the outer shape of the base member 1610 and to have a shape substantially along the base member 1610. A plurality of LEDs 1622a are arranged on the front surface of the substrate 1622 at appropriate intervals. The substrate 1622 is fixed to the front surface of the base member 1621.

The light diffusing member 1623 appropriately diffuses the light emitted from the LED 1622a. The light diffusing member 1623 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The outer shape of the light diffusing member 1623 is formed so as to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the substrate 1622. The light diffusing member 1623 is formed of a translucent material. The light diffusing member 1623 is formed with appropriate irregularities so that the light transmitted through the light diffusing member 1623 is diffused. The light diffusing member 1623 is arranged in front of the substrate 1622 so as to cover the substrate 1622 from the front. The light diffusing member 1623 is appropriately fixed to the base member 1621 via the substrate 1622.

The cover member 1624 is appropriately decorated. The cover member 1624 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The outer shape of the cover member 1624 is formed so as to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the base member 1621. The cover member 1624 is made of a translucent material. The cover member 1624 is arranged in front of the base member 1621 and the like so as to cover the base member 1621, the substrate 1622, and the light diffusing member 1623 from the front. The cover member 1624 is fixed to the base member 1621.

The rotation shaft 1625 shown in FIGS. 54 and 60 is a substantially columnar member. The rotating shaft 1625 is inserted into the cylindrical portion 1621a of the base member 1621 with the axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The rear end portion of the rotating shaft 1625 is fixed in a state of being inserted into a through hole 1611 (see FIG. 55) on the right side formed in the base member 1610. In this way, the base member 1621 of the movable body 1620 is rotatably supported with respect to the base member 1610 via the rotation shaft 1625.

The movable body 1620 on the right side configured in this way is rotatably supported with respect to the base member 1610 about the rotation shaft 1625. Further, when the LED 1622a mounted on the substrate 1622 is turned on, the light from the LED 322 is diffused by the light diffusing member 1623 and irradiated to the cover member 1624. Thereby, the decoration applied to the cover member 1624 can be made conspicuous.

Like the movable body 1620 on the right side, the movable body 1620 on the left side is rotatably supported with respect to the base member 1610 via the rotation shaft 1625. The rotating shaft 1625 that supports the left movable body 1620 is fixed in a state of being inserted into the left through hole 1611 (see FIG. 55) formed in the base member 1610.

The movement control means 1630 shown in FIGS. 57, 59, 60 and 62 controls the movement (rotation) of the movable body 1620. The movement control means 1630 mainly includes a motor 1631 and a driving force transmission mechanism 1632.

The motor 1631 shown in FIGS. 57 and 59 is a drive source for moving the movable body 1620. The motor 1631 is fixed to the lower part of the back surface (rear surface) of the base member 1610. The output shaft (not shown) of the motor 1631 is provided so as to penetrate the base member 1610 back and forth and project forward from the base member 1610.

The driving force transmission mechanism 1632 shown in FIGS. 60 and 62 transmits the driving force generated by the motor 1631 to the movable body 1620. The driving force transmission mechanism 1632 is appropriately supported on the front surface of the base member 1610. The driving force transmission mechanism 1632 mainly includes an output gear 1632a, a right first transmission gear 1632b, a right second transmission gear 1632c, a left first transmission gear 1632d, a left second transmission gear 1632e, and a left third transmission gear 1632f.

The output gear 1632a extracts the driving force of the motor 1631. The output gear 1632a is fixed to the front end of the output shaft of the motor 1631.

The right first transmission gear 1632b and the right second transmission gear 1632c are arranged side by side in order on the right side of the output gear 1632a. The output gear 1632a, the right first transmission gear 1632b, and the right second transmission gear 1632c are toothed to each other. A columnar transmission shaft portion 1632g projecting forward from the right second transmission gear 1632c is formed in the vicinity of the outer peripheral end portion of the right second transmission gear 1632c. The transmission shaft portion 1632 g is inserted into the elongated hole 1621b of the movable body 1620 on the right side.

The left first transmission gear 1632d, the left second transmission gear 1632e, and the left third transmission gear 1632f are arranged side by side on the left side of the output gear 1632a. The output gear 1632a, the left first transmission gear 1632d, the left second transmission gear 1632e, and the left third transmission gear 1632f are toothed to each other. A columnar transmission shaft portion 1632h projecting forward from the left third transmission gear 1632f is formed in the vicinity of the outer peripheral end portion of the left third transmission gear 1632f. The transmission shaft portion 1632h is inserted into the elongated hole 1621b of the movable body 1620 on the left side.

The cover member 1640 shown in FIG. 54 is appropriately decorated. The cover member 1640 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The cover member 1640 is arranged in front of the movement control means 1630 so as to cover the movement control means 1630 from the front. The cover member 1640 is fixed to the base member 1610. A part of the front surface of the cover member 1640 is appropriately decorated.

The first movable body 1600 configured in this way is configured as a single movable body that can be moved in the vertical direction by a movement control means described later. The vertical movement of the first movable body 1600 will be described in detail later.

Further, the first movable body 1600 can move (rotate) the movable body 1620 by the movement control means 1630. Specifically, when the motor 1631 is driven and the output gear 1632a is rotated clockwise in the rear view as shown in FIG. 63, the right second transmission gear 1632c is rotated clockwise in the rear view via the right first transmission gear 1632b. Rotate to. When the right second transmission gear 1632c rotates, the transmission shaft portion 1632g formed on the right second transmission gear 1632c pushes down the elongated hole 1621b of the right movable body 1620 downward. As a result, the movable body 1620 on the right side rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the rear with respect to the rotation shaft 1625.

Further, when the output gear 1632a is rotated clockwise in the rear view, the left third transmission gear 1632f is rotated counterclockwise in the rear view via the left first transmission gear 1632d and the left second transmission gear 1632e. When the left third transmission gear 1632f rotates, the transmission shaft portion 1632h formed on the left third transmission gear 1632f pushes down the elongated hole of the left movable body 1620 downward. As a result, the movable body 1620 on the left side rotates clockwise around the rotation shaft 1625.

When the motor 1631 is driven in the opposite direction (that is, the output gear 1632a is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the rear), contrary to the above, the movable body 1620 on the right side is rotated clockwise when viewed from the rear and the left side is rotated. The movable body 1620 can be rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the rear.

In this way, the first movable body 1600 can rotate the pair of left and right movable bodies 1620 at the same time by driving the motor 1631. In the following, the position where the movable body 1620 on the right side is rotated to the maximum counterclockwise in the front view and the movable body 1620 on the left side is rotated to the maximum in the clockwise direction in the front view (a pair of left and right movable bodies 1620 are left and right). The position (position rotated so as to spread) (see FIGS. 54 and 60) is referred to as a standby position of the movable body 1620. Further, the position where the movable body 1620 on the right side is rotated to the maximum in the front view clockwise and the movable body 1620 on the left side is rotated to the maximum in the counterclockwise direction in the front view (the pair of left and right movable bodies 1620 are both downward). The position (position rotated so as to face) (see FIGS. 64 and 68) is referred to as an effect position of the movable body 1620.

[Structure of the second movable body 1700]
The second movable body 1700 shown in FIGS. 55, 57, 58, 59 and 65 is movably supported (rotatably) with respect to the base member 1500. The second movable body 1700 is arranged behind the base member 1500 by being attached to the other surface side (rear surface side) of the base member 1500. A pair of left and right second movable bodies 1700 are provided with respect to the base member 1500. The left and right second movable bodies 1700 are formed substantially symmetrically with the left and right centers of the base member 1500 interposed therebetween. Therefore, in the following, the configuration of the second movable body 1700 on the right side will be specifically described, and the description of the configuration of the second movable body 1700 on the left side will be omitted as appropriate. The second movable body 1700 mainly includes a base member 1710, a substrate 1720, a light diffusing member 1730, a cover member 1740, and a rotating shaft 1750.

The base member 1710 shown in FIGS. 57, 59 and 65 supports each member constituting the second movable body 1700. The base member 1710 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The base member 1710 is formed in a horizontally long shape with the longitudinal direction directed to the left and right. The base member 1710 mainly comprises a cylindrical portion 1711 and an elongated hole 1712.

The cylindrical portion 1711 is a portion formed in a cylindrical shape with the axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The cylindrical portion 1711 is formed in the vicinity of the right end portion of the base member 1710.

The elongated hole 1712 penetrates the base member 1710 in the front-rear direction. The elongated hole 1712 is formed in the vicinity of the right end portion of the base member 1710 (immediately lower right of the cylindrical portion 1711). The elongated hole 1712 is formed so as to extend linearly by a predetermined distance from the vicinity of the cylindrical portion 1711 toward the lower right side (the lower right end side of the base member 1710).

The substrate 1720 shown in FIG. 65 is for mounting electronic components (functional components). The substrate 1720 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The outer shape of the substrate 1720 is formed to be one size smaller than the outer shape of the base member 1710 and to have a shape substantially along the base member 1710. A plurality of LEDs 1721 are arranged on the front surface of the substrate 1720 at appropriate intervals. The substrate 1720 is fixed to the front surface of the base member 1710.

The light diffusing member 1730 appropriately diffuses the light emitted from the LED 1721. The light diffusing member 1730 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The outer shape of the light diffusing member 1730 is formed so as to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the substrate 1720. The light diffusing member 1730 is formed of a translucent material. The light diffusing member 1730 is formed with appropriate irregularities so that the light transmitted through the light diffusing member 1730 is diffused. The light diffusing member 1730 is arranged in front of the substrate 1720 so as to cover the substrate 1720 from the front. The light diffusing member 1730 is fixed to the base member 1710.

The cover member 1740 is appropriately decorated. The cover member 1740 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The outer shape of the cover member 1740 is formed so as to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the base member 1710. The cover member 1740 is made of a translucent material. The cover member 1740 is arranged in front of the base member 1710 and the like so as to cover the base member 1710, the substrate 1720, and the light diffusing member 1730 from the front. The cover member 1740 is fixed to the base member 1710.

The rotation shaft 1750 shown in FIGS. 55, 57 and 59 is a substantially columnar member. The rotating shaft 1750 is inserted into the cylindrical portion 1711 of the base member 1710 with the axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The front portion of the rotating shaft 1750 is inserted into the lower right portion of the base member 1500. In this way, the base member 1710 of the second movable body 1700 is rotatably supported with respect to the base member 1500 via the rotation shaft 1750.

The second movable body 1700 on the right side configured in this way is rotatably supported with respect to the base member 1500 about the rotation shaft 1750. Further, when the LED 1721 mounted on the substrate 1720 is turned on, the light from the LED 1721 is diffused by the light diffusing member 1730 and irradiated to the cover member 1740. This makes the decoration on the cover member 1740 stand out.

Like the second movable body 1700 on the right side, the second movable body 1700 on the left side is rotatably supported with respect to the base member 1500 via the rotation shaft 1750. The rotation shaft 1750 that supports the second movable body 1700 on the left side is inserted into the lower left portion of the base member 1500.

[Structure of movement control means 1800]
The movement control means 1800 shown in FIGS. 55, 57 and 66 controls the movement of the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700. The movement control means 1800 is formed substantially symmetrically. Therefore, in the following, the configuration of the right half portion (right side) of the movement control means 1800 will be specifically described, and the description of the configuration of the left half portion (left side) of the movement control means 1800 will be omitted as appropriate. The movement control means 1800 mainly includes a motor 1810 and a driving force transmission mechanism 1820.

The motor 1810 shown in FIGS. 55 and 66 is a drive source for moving the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700. The motor 1810 is fixed to the upper right portion of the base member 1500. The motor 1810 is arranged so that its output shaft (not shown) faces rearward.

The driving force transmission mechanism 1820 transmits the driving force generated by the motor 1810 to the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700. The driving force transmission mechanism 1820 is appropriately supported by the base member 1500. The driving force transmission mechanism 1820 mainly includes an output gear 1821, a first transmission gear 1822, a second transmission gear 1823, an arm 1824, a third transmission gear 1825, and a fourth transmission gear 1826.

The output gear 1821 (see FIG. 57) extracts the driving force of the motor 1810. The output gear 1821 is fixed to the rear end of the output shaft of the motor 1810.

The first transmission gear 1822 is arranged substantially to the left of the output gear 1821 and meshes with the output gear 1821.

The second transmission gear 1823 is arranged substantially below the first transmission gear 1822 and meshes with the first transmission gear 1822. The second transmission gear 1823 mainly includes a transmission shaft portion 1823a.

The transmission shaft portion 1823a is a substantially columnar member. The transmission shaft portion 1823a is arranged so that the axial direction is directed to the front-rear direction. The transmission shaft portion 1823a is arranged at a position (eccentric position) separated from the center of the second transmission gear 1823 by a predetermined distance in front view. The rear end portion of the transmission shaft portion 1823a is fixed in a state of being inserted into the second transmission gear 1823.

The arm 1824 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The arm 1824 is arranged so that the longitudinal direction is substantially left and right. The arm 1824 is arranged immediately in front of the second transmission gear 1823. The arm 1824 mainly includes a rotation shaft 1824a, a first elongated hole 1824b, a second elongated hole 1824c, and a gear portion 1824d.

The rotation shaft 1824a is a substantially columnar member. The rotating shaft 1824a is arranged so that the axial direction is directed to the front-rear direction. The rotation shaft 1824a is arranged below the motor 1810 in front view. The rear end portion of the rotating shaft 1824a is fixed in a state of being inserted into the base member 1500. The front end portion of the rotating shaft 1824a is inserted into one end portion (right end portion) of the arm 1824. In this way, the arm 1824 is rotatably supported with respect to the base member 1500 via the rotation shaft 1824a.

The first elongated hole 1824b penetrates the arm 1824 in the front-rear direction. The first elongated hole 1824b is formed in the central portion of the arm 1824 in the longitudinal direction. The first elongated hole 1824b is formed so as to extend linearly by a predetermined distance along the longitudinal direction of the arm 1824. The transmission shaft portion 1823a of the second transmission gear 1823 is inserted into the first elongated hole 1824b.

The second elongated hole 1824c penetrates the arm 1824 in the front-rear direction. The second elongated hole 1824c is formed at the other end (left end) of the arm 1824. The second elongated hole 1824c is formed so as to extend linearly by a predetermined distance along the longitudinal direction of the arm 1824. The connecting shaft 1612 on the right side of the base member 1610 is inserted into the second elongated hole 1824c.

The gear portion 1824d is formed at one end (right end) of the arm 1824. The gear portion 1824d is formed so that its teeth face substantially downward. The teeth of the gear portion 1824d are formed so as to be arranged in an arc shape centered on the rotation shaft 1824a in a front view.

The third transmission gear 1825 is arranged substantially below the arm 1824 (gear portion 1824d) and meshes with the gear portion 1824d of the arm 1824.

The fourth transmission gear 1826 is arranged substantially to the right of the third transmission gear 1825 and is meshed with the third transmission gear 1825. The front end portion of the rotating shaft 1750 of the second movable body 1700 on the right side is inserted into the fourth transmission gear 1826. In this way, the fourth transmission gear 1826 can rotate about the same axis (rotation shaft 1750) as the second movable body 1700 on the right side. The fourth transmission gear 1826 mainly includes an arm portion 1826a and a connecting shaft 1826b.

The arm portion 1826a is a substantially plate-shaped portion when the plate surface is directed in the front-rear direction. The arm portion 1826a is formed so as to extend from the center (rotating shaft 1750) of the fourth transmission gear 1826 toward the lower right in the front view. The tip end portion (right lower end portion) of the arm portion 1826a is formed so as to overlap the arcuate hole 1530 on the right side of the base member 1500 when viewed from the front.

The connecting shaft 1826b connects the fourth transmission gear 1826 (arm portion 1826a) and the second movable body 1700. The connecting shaft 1826b is formed in a substantially columnar shape. The connecting shaft 1826b is arranged so that the axial direction is directed to the front-rear direction. The front end portion of the connecting shaft 1826b is inserted into the tip end portion (right lower end portion) of the arm portion 1826a. The middle part of the connecting shaft 1826b is inserted into the arcuate hole 1530 of the base member 1500. The rear end of the connecting shaft 1826b is inserted into an elongated hole 1712 formed in the base member 1710 of the second movable body 1700 on the right side.

[Movement of the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700]
The movement control means 1800 configured in this way can move the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700, respectively. Specifically, when the motor 1810 is driven and the output gear 1821 is rotated clockwise (see FIG. 57), the second transmission gear 1823 is viewed from the front via the first transmission gear 1822 (see FIG. 67). Rotate counterclockwise. When the second transmission gear 1823 rotates, the transmission shaft portion 1823a provided on the second transmission gear 1823 pushes down the first elongated hole 1824b of the arm 1824 downward. As a result, the arm 1824 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front with respect to the rotation shaft 1824a.

When the arm 1824 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the base member 1610 of the first movable body 1600 is pushed downward via the connecting shaft 1612. As a result, the first movable body 1600 moves downward (see FIGS. 67 to 70).

In this way, the force (rotational force) in the rotational direction of the second transmission gear 1823 is converted into a force in the linear direction (vertical direction) by the arm 1824 (second elongated hole 1824c). Further, the force in the linear direction is transmitted to the first movable body 1600 by the arm 1824 (second elongated hole 1824c).

Further, when the arm 1824 (gear portion 1824d) rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the fourth transmission gear 1826 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front via the third transmission gear 1825. When the fourth transmission gear 1826 rotates, the second movable body 1700 on the right side connected to the fourth transmission gear 1826 (arm portion 1826a) via the connecting shaft 1826b also rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front (FIG. 67). To FIG. 70).

By driving the motor 1810 in this way, the first movable body 1600 can be moved downward, and at the same time, the second movable body 1700 can be rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

When the motor 1810 is driven in the opposite direction (that is, the output gear 1821 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the rear (see FIG. 57)), the first movable body 1600 is moved upward at the same time, contrary to the above. The second movable body 1700 on the right side can be rotated clockwise in the front view.

Here, the motor 1631 is provided on the back surface of the first movable body 1600 (base member 1610), but the base member 1500 arranged behind the first movable body 1600 interferes with the motor 1631. The opening 1510 is formed so as to avoid the above. Therefore, even if the first movable body 1600 is moved up and down, the motor 1631 and the base member 1500 do not come into contact with each other.

In the above description, the operation of the right half of the movement control means 1800 has been described, but the same applies to the operation of the left half. That is, by driving the left and right motors 1810 at the same time, the first movable body 1600 is moved up and down, and at the same time, the left and right second movable bodies 1700 are rotated (that is, the second movable body 1700 on the right side is viewed from the front. While rotating clockwise, the second movable body 1700 on the left side can be rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front).

In the following, the position of the first movable body 1600 (the position where the first movable body 1600 is substantially raised to the maximum) in the state where the second transmission gear 1823 is rotated to the maximum clockwise in the front view (FIGS. 54, 55 and 66). (See) is referred to as a standby position of the first movable body 1600. Further, the position of the first movable body 1600 (the position where the first movable body 1600 is lowered to the maximum) in the state where the second transmission gear 1823 is rotated to the maximum counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIGS. 67 to 70). , Called the production position of the first movable body 1600.

When the first movable body 1600 is in the standby position, most of the first movable body 1600 is located (hidden) behind (hidden) the game board 17 and the stage 42, so that it is difficult for the player to see. It becomes a state (see FIG. 3). When the first movable body 1600 is in the effect position, most of the first movable body 1600 is exposed in front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the player can easily see it.

Further, the position of the second movable body 1700 in a state where the second transmission gear 1823 is rotated to the maximum in the front view clockwise (the second movable body 1700 on the right side is rotated to the maximum in the front view clockwise direction, and the second movable body on the left side is the first. (2) The position where the movable body 1700 is rotated to the maximum counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIGS. 54, 55 and 66) is referred to as a standby position of the second movable body 1700. Further, the position of the second movable body 1700 in a state where the second transmission gear 1823 is rotated to the maximum counterclockwise in the front view (the second movable body 1700 on the right side is rotated to the maximum in the counterclockwise direction in the front view and is to the left. The position where the second movable body 1700 is rotated to the maximum clockwise in the front view) (see FIGS. 67 to 70) is referred to as an effect position of the second movable body 1700.

When the second movable body 1700 is in the standby position, the second movable body 1700 is in a state where it is difficult for the player to see because substantially the entire second movable body 1700 is located behind the base member 1500. Further, when the second movable body 1700 is in the effect position, the second movable body 1700 is in a state where it is easily visible to the player because substantially the entire portion of the second movable body 1700 is located below the base member 1500.

The movement of the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 by the movement control means 1800 (the standby position (see FIG. 55) and the effect position (see FIG. 68) of the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700). (Movement between) and movement of the movable body 1620 provided in the first movable body 1600 (movement between the standby position (see FIG. 60) and the effect position (see FIG. 64) of the movable body 1620). Each can be done independently. That is, regardless of the position (standby position or effect position) of the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700, the movable body 1620 of the first movable body 1600 can be moved to the standby position or the effect position. It is possible. Note that FIGS. 69 and 70 show a state in which the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are in the effect position, and the movable body 1620 of the first movable body 1600 is in the effect position.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 54 to 59, the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are moved to the standby position, and the first movable body 1600 is housed immediately in front (front side) of the base member 1500. At the same time, by accommodating the second movable body 1700 immediately behind (rear surface side) the base member 1500, the entire second movable accessory unit 82 can be compactly formed. Therefore, when the second movable accessory unit 82 is transported, the space can be saved by accommodating the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 in the standby position. ..

When the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are in the standby position, the first movable body 1600 is in front of the base member 1500 (on the player side), and the second movable body 1700 is in the base member 1500. They are arranged behind the pachinko machine 1 (inside the pachinko game machine 1). Therefore, the distance (distance in the front-rear direction) between the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 can be secured, and even if an impact is applied to the second movable accessory unit 82 during transportation or the like. , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of contact between the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700. In particular, in the present embodiment, when the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are in the standby position, the base member 1500 is arranged between the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700. , The occurrence of contact between the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 can be suppressed more effectively.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 71, even when the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are moved to the effect position, the first movable body 1600 is in front of the base member 1500 in the front-rear direction. The second movable body 1700 is arranged behind the base member 1500. As described above, since the members (first movable body 1600 and second movable body 1700) that can be moved with respect to the base member 1500 are separately arranged in front of and behind the base member 1500, the second movable accessory. The center of gravity of the entire unit 82 will be located at a portion close to the base member 1500 (inside the base member or a portion close to the base member). Therefore, the moment of inertia generated when the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 operate (move) can be reduced, and the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 swing (vibration, etc.). ) Can be suppressed. Thereby, the occurrence of contact between the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 can be suppressed.

In particular, in the present embodiment, in front view, a pair of left and right second movable bodies 1700 are arranged substantially symmetrically with the first movable body 1600 in between. Therefore, the center of gravity of the entire second movable accessory unit 82 is located near the center of the left and right sides of the second movable accessory unit 82, and more effectively the first movable body 1600 and the second movable accessory unit 82 and the second movable accessory unit 82 are movable. It is possible to suppress the swing (vibration, etc.) of the body 1700.

Further, the motor 1631 of the first movable body 1600 is arranged at a position overlapping the base member 1500 in the front-rear direction (for example, in the opening position 1510 of the base member 1500 when the first movable body 1600 is in the standby position). (See Fig. 59, etc.). In this way, by arranging the motor 1631, which is a relatively heavy member of the first movable body 1600, at a position overlapping the base member 1500 in the front-rear direction, the center of gravity of the entire second movable accessory unit 82 is based. It becomes easy to position it in a portion close to the member 1500. Thereby, the swing (vibration, etc.) of the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 can be suppressed more effectively.

[Holding of the first movable body 1600 by the movement control means 1800]
Hereinafter, the configuration of the movement control means 1800 for holding the first movable body 1600 in the standby position will be described in detail.

Since the first movable body 1600 is constantly subjected to its own weight (force to move downward), the movement control means 1800 is placed in a predetermined position (particularly) so that the first movable body 1600 does not unintentionally move downward. In this embodiment, it is configured so that it can be held in the standby position). In FIGS. 72 to 74, in order to make it easier to understand the configuration for holding the first movable body 1600 in the standby position, a part of the movement control means 1800 (second transmission gear 1823 and arm 1824) and the first movable body are movable. A schematic diagram of the body 1600 is shown.

In the following description using FIGS. 72 to 74, a transmission shaft portion provided on the second transmission gear 1823 is provided in order to make it easier to understand the state of rotation (rotation position) of the second transmission gear 1823. The explanation will be given focusing on the rotation position of 1823a.

As shown in FIG. 72, when the first movable body 1600 is in the standby position, the second transmission gear 1823 is rotated clockwise to a predetermined position in the front view. The position of the transmission shaft portion 1823a at this time is referred to as a rotation position A. The rotation position A is a position on the upper right side of the center (rotation axis) of the second transmission gear 1823 in the front view. In this state, the transmission shaft portion 1823a is in contact with one end (right end) of the first elongated hole 1824b of the arm 1824.

As shown in FIG. 73, when the second transmission gear 1823 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state where the first movable body 1600 is in the standby position (see FIG. 72), the transmission shaft portion 1823a reaches a certain rotation position. Occasionally, the center line of the first elongated hole 1824b (arm 1824) (the straight line connecting the central points in the width direction (short direction) of the first elongated hole 1824b) L is the rotation locus of the transmission shaft portion 1823a in the front view. It touches the circle R along. The position of the transmission shaft portion 1823a at this time is referred to as a rotation position B. In this state, the first movable body 1600 is located at a position higher than the standby position (the highest position in the movable range of the first movable body 1600).

As shown in FIG. 74, when the second transmission gear 1823 is further rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 73, the first movable body 1600 can be moved to the effect position. The position of the transmission shaft portion 1823a at this time is referred to as a rotation position C. The rotation position C is a position substantially below the center (rotation axis) of the second transmission gear 1823 in the front view.

When the transmission shaft portion 1823a is located in the range (angle range X) between the rotation position A and the rotation position B, the second transmission gear 1823 rotates clockwise in the front view to cause the first movement. Body 1600 will move downwards. Further, in the state where the transmission shaft portion 1823a is located in the angle range X, the second transmission gear 1823 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, so that the first movable body 1600 moves upward.

When the transmission shaft portion 1823a is located in the range (angle range Y) between the rotation position B and the rotation position C, the second transmission gear 1823 rotates clockwise in the front view to cause the first movement. Body 1600 will move upwards. Further, in the state where the transmission shaft portion 1823a is located in the angle range Y, the second transmission gear 1823 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, so that the first movable body 1600 moves downward.

In the movement control means 1800 configured in this way, the arm 1824 is constantly subjected to a force that rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front due to the weight of the first movable body 1600. As shown in FIG. 72, when the transmission shaft portion 1823a is located in the angle range X, when the arm 1824 tries to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the second transmission gear 1823 is subjected to the transmission shaft portion 1823a. A force is applied to rotate the front view clockwise. However, in the state where the first movable body 1600 is in the standby position (the state shown in FIG. 72), the transmission shaft portion 1823a is in contact with the right end of the first elongated hole 1824b of the arm 1824, so that the second transmission gear 1823 is It cannot rotate any further. That is, even if a force due to the weight of the first movable body 1600 is applied to the arm 1824, the arm 1824 and the second transmission gear 1823 do not rotate, and the first movable body 1600 is held in the standby position.

In this way, the second transmission gear 1823 rotates clockwise in the front view, and the transmission shaft portion 1823a reaches the right end of the transmission shaft portion 1823a and the first elongated hole 1824b at a position (rotation position A) beyond the rotation position B. By abutting the first movable body 1600 and setting the state as the standby position of the first movable body 1600, the first movable body 1600 can be held so as not to move downward due to its own weight. In this case, since the driving force of the motor 1810 is not required to hold the first movable body 1600, the electric power is not wasted and the life of the motor 1810 is not shortened unnecessarily.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the gaming machine.
Further, the first movable body 1600 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the first movable body.
Further, the second movable body 1700 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the second movable body.
Further, the first movable body 1600 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the movable body.
Further, the motor 1810 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the driving means.
Further, the second transmission gear 1823 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the rotating body.
Further, the arm 1824 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the conversion mechanism and the reciprocating motion transmitting means.
Further, the first elongated hole 1824b according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the transfer control means.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, the single first movable body 1600 is attached to one side of the base member 1500, and the pair of second movable bodies 1700 are attached to the other side of the base member 1500. The number of (first movable body 1600 and second movable body 1700) is not limited to this. That is, a plurality of first movable bodies 1600 can be attached to the base member 1500, or a single unit or three or more second movable bodies 1700 can be attached to the base member 1500.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation of the second transmission gear 1823 beyond the angle range X in the front-view clockwise direction is restricted by the first elongated hole 1824b formed in the arm 1824 (FIG. 6). 66), the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotation of the second transmission gear 1823 may be restricted by other configurations. For example, it is also possible to separately provide a regulating member capable of contacting the transmission shaft portion 1823a provided on the second transmission gear 1823 to regulate the rotation of the second transmission gear 1823.

[Wiring configuration]
Hereinafter, the configuration relating to the wiring of the movable body (movable body 1620 of the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700) will be described.

The movable body 1620 and the second movable body 1700 of the first movable body 1600 each have a substrate (board 1622 and a board 1720) on which an LED is mounted, and it is necessary to supply electric power to the board via a wiring member. There is. However, when assembling the movable body 1620 or the second movable body 1700, the wiring member is not properly connected to the board, or the wiring member falls off from the board due to the movement of the movable body 1620 or the second movable body 1700. In that case, a problem such as being unable to supply power to the board occurs. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a configuration for suppressing the occurrence of such a defect. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

First, the configuration related to the wiring of the second movable body 1700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 80. In FIGS. 75 and 76, the light diffusing member 1730 and the cover member 1740 are not shown for convenience. Further, in FIG. 77, for convenience, the illustration of the flat cable 1770 described later is omitted. Further, in FIGS. 77 and 78, the light diffusing member 1730 is not shown for convenience.

The second movable body 1700 includes a connector 1760 and a flat cable 1770 in addition to the base member 1710, the substrate 1720, the light diffusing member 1730, the cover member 1740, and the rotating shaft 1750 described above.

The connector 1760 shown in FIGS. 75 to 78 draws electric power into the substrate 1720. The connector 1760 is provided in the upper right portion of the front surface of the substrate 1720. The connector 1760 is connected to the LED 1721 provided on the substrate 1720 and can supply electric power to the LED 1721. The connector 1760 is arranged with a connection portion to which a wiring member (in this embodiment, a flat cable 1770 described later) can be inserted and fixed, so as to be substantially upward in front view. The connector 1760 is connected to the flat cable 1770 by inserting the flat cable 1770 into the connection portion.

The flat cable 1770 shown in FIG. 76 and FIGS. 78 to 80 is a member for conducting electric power. The flat cable 1770 is formed in a sheet shape in which the length (width) in the width direction is shorter than the length in the longitudinal direction. The thickness of the flat cable 1770 is formed sufficiently small with respect to the width. The flat cable 1770 is flexible (flexible flat cable (FFC) is preferred). In FIG. 80, only the vicinity of one end of the flat cable 1770 (the end on the side connected to the connector 1760) is shown, but since the other end has substantially the same configuration, the other end is the same. The illustration of the part is omitted. The flat cable 1770 mainly comprises a power line 1771, an insulator 1772 and a reinforcing sheet 1773.

The power line 1771 is a portion where electric power is conducted. The power line 1771 is formed of a conductor. A plurality of power supply lines 1771 are arranged so as to be arranged substantially parallel to each other. The plurality of power supply lines 1771 include power supply lines 1771 to which different voltages are applied. In this way, the plurality of power supply lines 1771 can conduct electric power having a voltage suitable for the purpose.

The insulator 1772 covers the power supply line 1771. The insulator 1772 is formed in a sheet shape that covers substantially the entire power supply line 1771. The insulator 1772 is formed so as to expose one end of the power supply line 1771 from one side surface side.

The reinforcing sheet 1773 reinforces the end portion of the insulator 1772. The reinforcing sheet 1773 is provided on the other side surface side (the side opposite to the side where the power supply line 1771 is exposed) of one end portion of the insulator 1772. The reinforcing sheet 1773 is formed so as to have a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the other side surface side of the insulator 1772. The reinforcing sheet 1773 is colored differently from the insulator 1772. This makes it easy to distinguish between the reinforcing sheet 1773 and the insulator 1772.

The base member 1710 of the second movable body 1700 shown in FIGS. 75 to 79 includes an outer edge portion 1713 and a guide portion 1714 in addition to the above-mentioned cylindrical portion 1711 and elongated hole 1712.

The outer edge portion 1713 is a portion formed (erected) so as to extend forward from the base member 1710. The outer edge portion 1713 is formed substantially along the outer shape of the base member 1710. A recess 1713a is formed in the outer edge portion 1713.

The recess 1713a is a portion formed by denting the front end surface of the outer edge portion 1713 toward the rear. The recess 1713a is formed in the upper right portion of the outer edge portion 1713. More specifically, the recess 1713a is formed in a portion facing the upper end surface (connecting portion) of the connector 1760 when viewed from the front. The recess 1713a is formed so as to be linear along the outer edge 1713 when viewed from the front. The recess 1713a is formed so as to have substantially the same length as the width of the flat cable 1770. The recess 1713a is formed so as to have a substantially arc shape in a cross-sectional view (see FIGS. 77 to 79).

The guide unit 1714 guides the flat cable 1770 so as to follow a normal wiring path. The guide portion 1714 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape. A pair of guide portions 1714 are provided on the upper right portion of the base member 1710 so as to face each other. The pair of guide portions 1714 are arranged so as to sandwich the recess 1713a between them. The distance between the pair of guide portions 1714 is formed so as to be substantially the same as the width of the flat cable 1770. The guide portion 1714 is arranged so as to extend from the outer edge portion 1713 toward the inside of the base member 1710 (connector 1760) in the front view. The width (height) of the guide portion 1714 in the front-rear direction is formed so as to be larger than the width in the front-rear direction of the outer edge portion 1713 to which the guide portion 1714 is adjacent. That is, the front end portion of the guide portion 1714 projects forward from the front end portion of the outer edge portion 1713.

The substrate 1720 includes a reference line 1722 in addition to the LED1721 described above.

The reference line 1722 shown in FIGS. 75 to 77 serves as a guide for the position of the flat cable 1770. The reference line 1722 is formed by appropriately printing the front surface of the substrate 1720. The reference line 1722 is formed on the front surface of the substrate 1720 substantially above the connector 1760. The reference line 1722 is formed in a straight line parallel to the upper end surface (connection portion) of the connector 1760.

The cover member 1740 of the second movable body 1700 shown in FIGS. 77 to 79 includes an outer edge portion 1741.

The outer edge portion 1741 is a portion formed (erected) so as to extend rearward from the cover member 1740. The outer edge portion 1741 is formed substantially along the outer shape of the cover member 1740. A convex portion 1741a is formed on the outer edge portion 1741.

The convex portion 1741a is a portion formed by projecting the rear end surface of the outer edge portion 1741 toward the rear. The convex portion 1741a is formed in the upper right portion of the outer edge portion 1741. More specifically, the convex portion 1741a is formed in a portion facing the concave portion 1713a formed in the base member 1710 in the front-rear direction. The convex portion 1741a is formed so as to have substantially the same length as the width of the flat cable 1770, similarly to the concave portion 1713a. The convex portion 1741a is formed so as to have a substantially arc shape in a cross-sectional view (see FIGS. 77 to 79).

Here, the concave portion 1713a and the convex portion 1741a are formed so as to have curved surfaces having different shapes in a cross-sectional view (see FIG. 79). Specifically, the convex portion 1741a is formed in a shape that can be engaged with the concave portion 1713a (can enter the concave portion 1713a) when the cover member 1740 is fixed to the base member 1710. Further, when the cover member 1740 is fixed to the base member 1710, the convex portion 1741a is closest to the concave portion 1713a in cross-sectional view at two locations (the D portion and the E portion in FIG. 79) (in the present embodiment). , Abut). The D portion is a portion inside the tip of the convex portion 1741a in the thickness direction of the outer edge portion 1741 (the left-right direction of the paper surface in FIG. 79). Further, the E portion is a portion outside the tip of the convex portion 1741a in the thickness direction of the outer edge portion 1741.

Hereinafter, a method of assembling the second movable body 1700, particularly a method of accurately connecting the flat cable 1770 to the connector 1760 will be described.

When connecting the flat cable 1770 by inserting it into the connector 1760, check whether the flat cable 1770 is accurately connected to the connector 1760 by referring to the reinforcing sheet 1737 of the flat cable 1770 and the reference line 1722 of the board 1720. be able to.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 81, with the flat cable 1770 accurately connected to the connector 1760 in advance, the end of the reinforcing sheet 1737 of the flat cable 1770 coincides with the reference line 1722 in front view (overlap). ), The printing position of the reference line 1722 is adjusted. Therefore, the operator can perform the work accurately by attaching the flat cable 1770 to the connector 1760 so that the end portion of the reinforcing sheet 1773 coincides with the reference line 1722.

If the flat cable 1770 is connected in an inclined state with respect to the connector 1760, as shown in FIG. 82, the end portion of the reinforcing sheet 1737 does not match the reference line 1722, so that the flat cable 1770 can be seen at first glance. It turns out that the connection is inaccurate.

Further, when the flat cable 1770 is accurately connected to the connector 1760, the flat cable 1770 is arranged so as to extend from the connector 1760 toward the guide portion 1714. The flat cable 1770 is guided by a pair of guides 1714. Specifically, the flat cable 1770 is arranged so as to be sandwiched by the guide portions 1714 from both sides in the width direction. Therefore, even if the flat cable 1770 tries to move in the width direction, one of the pair of guide portions 1714 comes into contact with the flat cable 1770, and the movement of the flat cable 1770 in the width direction is restricted. In this way, the guide unit 1714 guides the flat cable 1770 so as to follow a normal wiring path.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the second movable body 1700 moves (rotates) around a rotation shaft 1750 extending in the front-rear direction. That is, the second movable body 1700 moves on a plane parallel to the plane of the flat cable 1770. Therefore, a force is likely to be applied to the flat cable 1770 along a direction parallel to the surface of the flat cable 1770 (for example, a width direction). However, in the present embodiment, by arranging the guide portions 1714 on both sides of the flat cable 1770 in the width direction, the movement of the flat cable 1770 in the width direction can be effectively regulated.

Further, the direction in which the pair of guide portions 1714 guide the flat cable 1770 is formed so as to be exactly the same as the direction in which the flat cable 1770 is inserted into the connector 1760. That is, the connecting portion of the connector 1760 is arranged on the extension line in the direction in which the pair of guide portions 1714 extends in the front view. Therefore, if the flat cable 1770 is connected to the connector 1760 in an inclined state, the flat cable 1770 interferes with the guide portion 1714 as shown in FIG. 82, so that the flat cable 1770 seems to have a flat cable 1770. It turns out that the connection is inaccurate.

The flat cable 1770 may be inserted into the connector 1760 after fixing the substrate 1720 to the base member 1710, or may be inserted into the connector 1760 before fixing the substrate 1720 to the base member 1710. When the flat cable 1770 is inserted into the connector 1760 after fixing the board 1720 to the base member 1710, the flat cable 1770 interferes with the guide portion 1714 unless the flat cable 1770 is inserted correctly (so as not to tilt). It turns out that the connection of the flat cable 1770 is inaccurate. Further, when the flat cable 1770 is inserted into the connector 1760 before fixing the board 1720 to the base member 1710, if the flat cable 1770 is not inserted correctly, the flat cable 1770 will be used when fixing the board 1720 to the base member 1710. At first glance, it can be seen that the connection of the flat cable 1770 is inaccurate because it interferes with the guide portion 1714.

Further, after the flat cable 1770 is accurately inserted into the connector 1760, the cover member 1740 is fixed to the base member 1710 from the front as shown in FIGS. 77 to 79. Specifically, the outer edge portion 1713 of the base member 1710 and the outer edge portion 1741 of the cover member 1740 are abutted against each other and fixed in contact with each other. In this way, the base member 1710 and the cover member 1740 form a box-shaped member. The space formed inside the base member 1710 and the cover member 1740 accommodates the vicinity of the tip end portion (the end portion on the connector 1760 side) of the substrate 1720, the connector 1760, and the flat cable 1770.

Here, when the cover member 1740 is fixed to the base member 1710, as shown in FIG. 79, a predetermined butt portion (specifically, a convex portion 1741a of the cover member 1740 and a concave portion 1713a of the base member 1710) The flat cable 1770 is sandwiched and fixed. Here, the convex portion 1741a and the concave portion 1713a are formed in a substantially arc shape. Therefore, the flat cable 1770 is sandwiched between the convex portion 1741a and the concave portion 1713a in a state of being bent along the convex portion 1741a and the concave portion 1713a.

By sandwiching and fixing the bent portion of the flat cable 1770 in this way, the flat cable 1770 can be firmly held against the base member 1710 and the cover member 1740. Thereby, even if the second movable body 1700 moves, the flat cable 1770 can be prevented from moving with respect to the base member 1710, and thus the flat cable 1770 can be prevented from coming off from the connector 1760. ..

In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79, the flat cable 1770 can be sandwiched at two places (part D and part E). Therefore, the flat cable 1770 can be held more firmly than when it is sandwiched at one place. Further, since the portion (convex portion 1741a and concave portion 1713a) that sandwiches the flat cable 1770 is formed in a curved surface, it is difficult for an excessive load to be applied to the flat cable 1770, and the flat cable 1770 is damaged or broken at the portion. Can be suppressed.

The shape of the butt portion (the convex portion 1741a of the cover member 1740 and the concave portion 1713a of the base member 1710) for sandwiching the flat cable 1770 is not limited to that shown in FIG. 79. Hereinafter, a modified example of the butt portion will be described with reference to FIG. 83.

In the modified example (first modified example) shown in FIG. 83 (a), the cover member 1740 is formed with a convex portion 1741b, and the base member 1710 is formed with a concave portion 1713b. The convex portion 1741b of the cover member 1740 is formed so as to have a substantially trapezoidal shape (equal leg trapezoidal shape) in a cross-sectional view. The concave portion 1713b of the base member 1710 is formed so as to have the same shape (substantially trapezoidal shape) as the convex portion 1741b in a cross-sectional view.

In the butt portion (convex portion 1741b of the cover member 1740 and the concave portion 1713b of the base member 1710) configured in this way, the flat cable 1770 can be sandwiched by substantially the entire surface of the convex portion 1741b and the concave portion 1713b. As a result, the flat cable 1770 can be firmly fixed.

In the modified example (second modified example) shown in FIG. 83 (b), the cover member 1740 is formed with a convex portion 1741c, and the base member 1710 is formed with a concave portion 1713c. The convex portion 1741c of the cover member 1740 is formed so as to have a substantially trapezoidal shape (equal leg trapezoidal shape) in a cross-sectional view. The recess 1713c of the base member 1710 is formed so as to have a substantially trapezoidal shape (equal leg trapezoidal shape) in a cross-sectional view. The trapezoidal legs of the convex portion 1741c and the trapezoidal legs of the concave portion 1713c (legs facing each other) are formed so as to be parallel to each other. The rear bottom side of the trapezoid of the concave portion 1713c (the bottom side of the concave portion 1713c) is formed to be shorter than the rear bottom side of the trapezoid of the convex portion 1741c (the side on the tip side of the convex portion 1741c).

In the butt portion (convex portion 1741c of the cover member 1740 and the concave portion 1713c of the base member 1710) configured in this way, the flat cable 1770 is sandwiched between the inclined surfaces (trapezoidal legs) of the convex portion 1741c and the concave portion 1713c. Can be done. At this time, a gap is formed between the tip of the convex portion 1741c and the bottom of the concave portion 1713c. Therefore, the flat cable 1770 can be gently bent in the gap.

In such a second modification, it is difficult for an excessive load to be applied to the flat cable 1770 due to the corners (tops of the trapezoid) of the convex portion 1741c and the concave portion 1713c, and damage or disconnection of the flat cable 1770 is suppressed. be able to.

In the modified example (third modified example) shown in FIG. 83 (c), the concave-convex portion 1741d is formed on the cover member 1740, and the concave-convex portion 1713d is formed on the base member 1710. The uneven portion 1741d of the cover member 1740 is formed so as to have a wavy shape in a cross-sectional view. The uneven portion 1713d of the base member 1710 is formed so as to have the same shape (wave shape) as the uneven portion 1741d of the cover member 1740 in a cross-sectional view.

In the abutting portion (concavo-convex portion 1741d of the cover member 1740 and the concavo-convex portion 1713d of the base member 1710) configured in this way, the flat cable 1770 can be sandwiched by substantially the entire surface of the concavo-convex portion 1741d and the concavo-convex portion 1713d. As a result, the flat cable 1770 can be firmly fixed. Further, since the uneven portion 1741d and the uneven portion 1713d are formed in a curved surface shape without corners, an excessive load is unlikely to be applied to the flat cable 1770, and damage or disconnection of the flat cable 1770 can be suppressed. ..

Next, the configuration relating to the wiring of the movable body 1620 of the first movable body 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86.

The movable body 1620 includes a connector 1626 and a flat cable 1627 in addition to the base member 1621, the substrate 1622, the light diffusing member 1623, the cover member 1624, and the rotating shaft 1625 described above.

The connector 1626 shown in FIGS. 85 and 86 draws power into the substrate 1622. The connector 1626 is provided on the upper left portion of the rear surface of the substrate 1622. The connector 1626 is connected to the LED 1622a provided on the substrate 1622 and can supply electric power to the LED 1622a. The connector 1626 is arranged with a connecting portion capable of inserting and fixing a wiring member (in this embodiment, a flat cable 1627 described later) toward the substantially upper left side of the rear view. The connector 1626 is connected to the flat cable 1627 by inserting the flat cable 1627 into the connection portion.

The flat cable 1627 shown in FIG. 85 is a member for conducting electric power. The flat cable 1627 includes a power supply line (not shown), an insulator 1627b, and a reinforcing sheet 1627c, similarly to the flat cable 1770 of the second movable body 1700. Since the flat cable 1627 has substantially the same configuration as the flat cable 1770 of the second movable body 1700, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The substrate 1622 of the movable body 1620 shown in FIGS. 84 to 86 includes a reference line 1622b in addition to the LED 1622a described above.

The reference line 1622b serves as a guide for the position of the flat cable 1627. The reference line 1622b is formed by appropriately printing the rear surface of the substrate 1622. The reference line 1622b is formed on the rear surface of the substrate 1622 at substantially the upper left of the connector 1626. The reference line 1622b is formed in a straight line parallel to the upper left end surface (connection portion) of the connector 1626.

The base member 1621 of the movable body 1620 shown in FIGS. 84 and 86 includes an opening 1621c in addition to the above-mentioned cylindrical portion 1621a and elongated hole 1621b.

The opening 1621c shown in FIG. 86 is a portion formed so as to penetrate the base member 1621 in the front-rear direction. The opening 1621c is formed in the upper left portion of the base member 1621. Specifically, the opening 1621c is formed at a position facing the connector 1626 and the reference line 1622b provided on the substrate 1622 when the substrate 1622 is attached to the base member 1621. The opening 1621c is formed in a size and shape such that the connector 1626 and the reference line 1622b can be sufficiently visually recognized from the rear through the opening 1621c. In the present embodiment, the opening 1621c is formed in a substantially rectangular shape which is one size larger than the connector 1626 in the rear view.

Hereinafter, a method of assembling the movable body 1620, particularly a method of accurately connecting the flat cable 1627 to the connector 1626 will be described.

When the flat cable 1627 is inserted into the connector 1626 and connected, as shown in FIG. 85, the flat cable 1627 is accurately connected to the connector 1626 with reference to the reinforcing sheet 1627c of the flat cable 1627 and the reference line 1622b of the board 1622. You can check if it is connected.

Further, after the flat cable 1627 is accurately inserted into the connector 1626, the substrate 1622 is fixed to the base member 1621 as shown in FIGS. 84 and 86. In this state, the connector 1626 is arranged so as to face the opening 1621c of the base member 1621. Thereby, the portion where the flat cable 1627 is inserted into the connector 1626 can be confirmed from the rear of the base member 1621 via the opening 1621c. Therefore, after the substrate 1622 is fixed to the base member 1621, it can be easily confirmed whether or not the flat cable 1627 is accurately inserted into the connector 1626.

In the above description, the movable body 1620 is provided with an opening 1621c so that the flat cable 1627 can be visually recognized (see FIG. 86). Similarly, the second movable body 1700 has an opening (opening described later). It is also possible to provide a portion 1715). Hereinafter, the second movable body 1700 (a modified example of the second movable body 1700) having the opening 1715 will be described with reference to FIG. 87.

In the modified example of the second movable body 1700 shown in FIG. 87, the connector 1760 and the reference line 1722 are provided in the upper right portion of the rear surface of the substrate 1720.

Further, in the modified example of the second movable body 1700, the opening 1715 is formed in the base member 1710. The opening 1715 is a portion formed so as to penetrate the base member 1710 in the front-rear direction. The opening 1715 is formed in the upper right portion of the base member 1710. Specifically, the opening 1715 is formed at a position facing the connector 1760, the reference line 1722, and the guide portion 1714 provided on the substrate 1720 when the substrate 1720 is attached to the base member 1710. The opening 1715 is formed in a size and shape such that the connector 1760, the reference line 1722, and the guide portion 1714 can be sufficiently visually recognized from the rear through the opening 1715. In the present embodiment, the opening 1715 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape that is one size larger than the connector 1760 in the rear view.

In the second movable body 1700 configured in this way, the state in which the flat cable 1770 is inserted into the connector 1760 and guided by the guide portion 1714 is shown from the rear of the base member 1710 via the opening 1715. You can check. Therefore, even after fixing the substrate 1720, the cover member 1740, etc. to the base member 1710, it is determined whether the flat cable 1770 is accurately inserted into the connector 1760 and whether the flat cable 1770 follows a normal wiring path. It can be easily confirmed.

In addition, in FIG. 87, a modified example in which the opening 1715 is applied to the second movable body 1700 is shown, but in addition, a guide portion (guide portion) as provided in the second movable body 1700 in the movable body 1620. 1714) (see FIG. 81) may be provided, or butt portions (convex 1741a and concave 1713a) (see FIG. 79) may be provided.

The LED1721 according to this embodiment is an embodiment of an electronic component.
Further, the base member 1710 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the direction-determining means.
Further, the base member 1710 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the first member.
Further, the cover member 1740 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the second member.
Further, the flat cable 1770 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the wiring member.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, power is supplied to the LED 1721 by a flat cable 1770, but the present invention is not limited to this, and power may be supplied to other electronic components. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, the guide portion 1714 is provided on the base member 1710, but may be provided on other members (for example, the cover member 1740 or the like).

Further, the flat cable 1770 does not need to be in constant contact with the guide portion 1714. For example, normally (a state in which the second movable body 1700 is not moving) may be simply arranged so as to pass between the pair of guide portions 1714 without abutting against the pair of guide portions 1714. Even with such a configuration, when the flat cable 1770 tries to move in the width direction, it comes into contact with one of the pair of guide portions 1714, and the movement of the flat cable 1770 can be restricted. can.

Further, in the present embodiment, some shapes of the butt portion sandwiching the flat cable 1770 have been illustrated (see FIGS. 79 and 83), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the flat cable 1770 is in a bent state. Any shape may be used as long as it can be fixed with.

Further, in the present embodiment (for example, the second movable body 1700 shown in FIG. 87), the connector 1760 and the flat cable 1627 provided on the rear surface of the board 1720 are arranged behind the board 1720 so as to be visible. The base member 1710 is provided with an opening 1715, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the connector 1760 is provided on the front surface of the substrate 1720, an opening is appropriately provided in the light diffusing member 1730 and the cover member 1740 arranged in front of the substrate 1720 so that the connector 1760 and the like can be visually recognized from the front. It is also possible to.

Further, in the present embodiment, the reference line 1622b and the reference line 1722, which serve as a guide for the positions of the flat cable 1627 and the flat cable 1770, are formed by appropriately printing the substrate 1622 and the substrate 1720. For example, instead of printing, it is possible to attach a reference member to the substrate 1622 and the substrate 1720.

Further, in the present embodiment, the flat cable 1770 is exemplified as the wiring member, but various other wiring members can also be used.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be, for example, a pachislot gaming machine.

Hereinafter, the configuration of the effect device 2400 according to the first embodiment of the first movable accessory unit will be described in detail.

The effect device 2400 shown in FIG. 88 is a device for giving a visual impression (impact) to the player by rotating a drum-shaped accessory (drum body 2420 described later). As shown in FIGS. 88 to 90, the effect device 2400 includes a mounting base 2410, a drum main body 2420, a light emitting unit 2430, and a drive transmission mechanism 2440.

The mounting base 2410 supports a drum body 2420 or the like, which will be described later. The mounting base 2410 includes an accommodating member 2411, a right receiving member 2412, a left receiving member 2413, and a shaft member 2414.

The accommodating member 2411 is for accommodating the drum body 2420 and the like. The accommodating member 2411 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with a bottom whose axial direction is directed to the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the accommodating member 2411 is arranged on the right side, and the left portion and the front portion thereof open. The accommodating member 2411 is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the stage 42 via a decorative member or the like of the effect device 2400.

The right receiving member 2412 is for supporting the right end portion of the drum main body 2420. The right receiving member 2412 is formed in a substantially disk shape. The right receiving member 2412 is formed so that its outer diameter is large enough to be accommodated in the accommodating member 2411. The right receiving member 2412 is fixed to the bottom surface (right end portion) of the accommodating member 2411 by a screw and is accommodated in the accommodating member 2411.

The left side receiving member 2413 is for supporting the left end portion of the drum main body 2420. The left side receiving member 2413 is formed in a substantially plate shape with its plate surface oriented in the left-right direction. The left side receiving member 2413 is formed so that its width in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the accommodating member 2411. Further, the left side receiving member 2413 is formed so that its vertical width is wider than the vertical width of the accommodating member 2411. The lower part of the right side surface of the left side receiving member 2413 is recessed to the left except for a part. The lower portion of the left receiving member 2413 is fixed to the left end of the accommodating member 2411 by a screw. The left side receiving member 2413 includes an outer protruding portion 2413a and an inner protruding portion 2413b.

The outer protruding portion 2413a is formed in the lower portion (recessed portion) of the right side surface of the left side receiving member 2413. The outer protruding portion 2413a projects to the right from the right side surface of the left side receiving member 2413. The outer protrusion 2413a is formed in a substantially annular shape in a lateral view.

The inner protrusion 2413b projects to the right from the center of the outer protrusion 2413a. The medial protrusion 2413b is formed in a substantially annular shape in a lateral view. Further, the inner edge portion of the inner protruding portion 2413b is formed in a substantially hexagonal shape in a side view.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, the shaft member 2414 is a substantially hexagonal columnar member whose axial direction is directed to the left-right direction. The left end of the shaft member 2414 is supported by the inner protrusion 2413b. The right end of the shaft member 2414 is supported by the bottom surface of the accommodating member 2411 and the right receiving member 2412. The shaft member 2414 supports a light emitting unit 2430, which will be described later, via a connecting member 2414a attached to the left and right intermediate portions thereof.

The drum body 2420 is a member for rotating the symbol C. As shown in FIGS. 91 to 93, the drum main body 2420 includes a base member 2421, a reel seat 2422, a left side mounting member 2423, and a right side mounting member 2424.

The base member 2421 is for accommodating the reel seat 2422 described later. The base member 2421 is formed in a hollow substantially truncated cone shape with its axial direction directed to the left and right. The base member 2421 is formed so that its outer diameter and inner diameter gradually decrease from the right end portion to the left end portion. The base member 2421 is formed so that the outer diameter of the right end portion thereof is large enough to be accommodated in the accommodating member 2411 (see FIG. 88). The left portion of the base member 2421 is closed and the right portion is opened. The base member 2421 is made of a transparent resin material so that the inside can be visually recognized. As shown in FIGS. 93 and 94, the base member 2421 includes a first protrusion 2421a, a second protrusion 2421b, a third protrusion 2421c, a through hole 2421d, and an engagement hole 2421e.

The first protrusion 2421a projects radially inward from the inner peripheral surface of the base member 2421. The first protrusion 2421a is arranged at the left end of the base member 2421 and is formed so as to be connected to the bottom surface of the base member 2421. In this way, the first protrusion 2421a is formed so as to project to the right from the bottom surface of the base member 2421. The first protrusion 2421a is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a side view. The first protrusion 2421a is formed at the rear end of the bottom surface of the base member 2421 (at the 3 o'clock position of the clock in FIG. 94).

The second protrusion 2421b is formed in substantially the same shape as the first protrusion 2421a. The second protrusions 2421b are arranged at intervals in the circumferential direction of the base member 2421 with respect to the first protrusions 2421a. The second protrusion 2421b is formed on the front upper portion (position in FIG. 94 between 10 o'clock and 11 o'clock of the clock) of the bottom surface of the base member 2421.

The third protrusion 2421c is formed so as to be vertically symmetrical with respect to the second protrusion 2421b with reference to the upper and lower central portions of the base member 2421. The third protrusion 2421c is formed at the lower front part of the bottom surface of the base member 2421 (position between 7 o'clock and 8 o'clock in FIG. 94).

The through hole 2421d is a substantially circular hole in the side view formed on the bottom surface of the base member 2421. The through hole 2421d has an inner diameter through which the shaft member 2414 can be inserted. The through hole 2421d penetrates the center of the bottom surface of the base member 2421 in the left-right direction.

The engaging hole 2421e is a substantially quadrangular hole formed at the right end portion of the base member 2421. The engaging hole 2421e penetrates the base member 2421 from the outer peripheral surface to the inner peripheral surface in the radial direction. A plurality of engagement holes 2421e (three in this embodiment) are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction.

As shown in FIG. 88, the base member 2421 configured in this way is attached to the accommodating member 2411 via the left side attachment member 2423 or the like, which will be described later. As a result, the base member 2421 is housed in the housing member 2411 so that the player can see it from the front. Further, as shown in FIG. 89, the shaft member 2414 is inserted into the through hole 2421d of the base member 2421. The base member 2421 is provided on the mounting base 2410 so as to be rotatable relative to the shaft member 2414.

As shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the reel sheet 2422 is a member on which the symbol C is printed on the outer peripheral surface. The symbol C enhances the interest of the player by making the player visually recognize or not visually in the game production. In this embodiment, a plurality of symbols such as a number symbol of "111" and a character symbol of "HIT" are adopted as the symbol C. Further, the symbol C is appropriately omitted in the drawings except the exploded perspective views (FIGS. 92, 93 and 98) in order to make it easier to see the other members.
The reel seat 2422 is formed by rolling a sheet-shaped member. The reel sheet 2422 is formed so that its outer peripheral shape is substantially the same as the inner peripheral shape of the base member 2421. The reel seat 2422 is formed so that its lateral width is shorter than the lateral width of the base member 2421. On the outer peripheral surface of the reel sheet 2422, a paint that transmits light is applied to a portion corresponding to the symbol C, and a paint that does not transmit light (shields light) is applied to the other portion. As a result, the reel sheet 2422 is configured to be capable of transmitting light in the portion where the symbol C is printed, and is configured to be opaque to light in the portion where the symbol C is not printed. As shown in FIGS. 93 and 95, the reel sheet 2422 includes a first notch 2422a, a second notch 2422b, a third notch 2422c, and a superposed portion 2422d.

The first notch portion 2422a is formed at the left rear end portion of the reel seat 2422. The first notch portion 2422a is formed in a substantially arc shape. The first notch 2422a corresponds to the first protrusion 2421a of the base member 2421. That is, the first notch portion 2422a is configured to be engageable with the first protrusion portion 2421a.

The second notch portion 2422b is formed so as to have substantially the same shape as the first notch portion 2422a. The second notch portion 2422b is arranged with respect to the first notch portion 2422a at intervals in the circumferential direction of the reel seat 2422. The second notch portion 2422b is formed in the front upper portion at the left end portion of the reel seat 2422. The second notch 2422b corresponds to the second protrusion 2421b. That is, the second notch portion 2422b is configured to be engageable with the second protrusion portion 2421b.

The third notch portion 2422c is formed so as to be vertically symmetrical with respect to the second notch portion 2422b with reference to the upper and lower central portions of the reel seat 2422. The third notch portion 2422c is formed in the lower front portion at the left end portion of the reel seat 2422. The third notch 2422c corresponds to the third protrusion 2421c. That is, the third notch portion 2422c is configured to be engageable with the third protrusion portion 2421c.

Such a clockwise distance L1a from the first cutout portion 2422a to the second cutout portion 2422b in FIG. 95 is the clockwise direction in FIG. 95 from the second cutout portion 2422b to the third cutout portion 2422c. It is formed so as to be longer than the distance L2a of.

The overlapping portion 2422d is a portion (one end portion and the other end portion in the circumferential direction) where the reel seats 2422 overlap in the radial direction. The overlapping portion 2422d is formed from the left end portion to the right end portion of the reel sheet 2422. The overlapping portion 2422d is formed in a portion where the design C is not printed. Further, the overlapping portion 2422d is formed in a portion where the first cutout portion 2422a, the second cutout portion 2422b, and the third cutout portion 2422c are not formed. The overlapping portion 2422d according to the present embodiment is formed on the rear upper portion of the reel sheet 2422.

The reel seat 2422 thus configured is housed in the base member 2421 as shown in FIGS. 93 and 96. At this time, the first notch portion 2422a engages with the first protrusion portion 2421a. Further, the second notch portion 2422b engages with the second protrusion portion 2421b. Further, the third notch portion 2422c engages with the third protrusion portion 2421c. As described above, the reel seat 2422 is configured such that the symbol C is arranged at a specific position of the base member 2421 and is rotatable integrally with the base member 2421. Further, the symbol C of the reel sheet 2422 can be visually recognized from the outside of the base member 2421 in a state where the reel sheet 2422 is housed in the base member 2421.

As shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the left side mounting member 2423 is an external gear for rotating the base member 2421. The left side mounting member 2423 includes a recess 2423a and a through hole 2423b.

The recess 2423a is a substantially circular recess formed on the left side surface of the left side mounting member 2423. The recess 2423a is formed so as to have an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the outer protruding portion 2413a of the left side receiving member 2413 (see FIG. 97).

The through hole 2423b is a hole that penetrates the center of the left side mounting member 2423 in the left-right direction. The through hole 2423b is formed in a substantially circular shape with an inner diameter through which the shaft member 2414 can be inserted.

The left side mounting member 2423 configured in this way is fixed to the bottom surface (left end portion) of the base member 2421 by screws. As a result, the left side mounting member 2423 is configured to be rotatable integrally with the base member 2421. Further, as shown in FIGS. 89 and 97, the left side mounting member 2423 is supported by the left side receiving member 2413 so as to be relatively rotatable by fitting the recess 2423a into the outer protrusion 2413a of the left side receiving member 2413. Further, the shaft member 2414 is inserted into the through hole 2423b of the left side mounting member 2423. As a result, the left side mounting member 2423 is provided on the mounting base 2410 so as to be rotatable relative to the shaft member 2414.

As shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the right side mounting member 2424 is a substantially annular member attached to the right end portion of the base member 2421. The right side mounting member 2424 is formed so that the outer diameter of the left end portion thereof is smaller than the inner diameter of the right end portion of the base member 2421. The right side mounting member 2424 includes a flange portion 2424a and a claw portion 2424b.

The flange portion 2424a is formed in the middle left and right of the right side mounting member 2424. The flange portion 2424a is formed so that its outer diameter is larger than the inner diameter of the right end portion of the base member 2421 and smaller than the outer diameter of the right end portion of the base member 2421.

The claw portion 2424b is formed at the left end portion of the right side mounting member 2424. The tip of the claw portion 2424b projects radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the right side mounting member 2424. A plurality of claw portions 2424b are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction. More specifically, three claw portions 2424b are formed at intervals substantially the same as the circumferential spacing of the engaging holes 2421e of the base member 2421.

The left end of the right side mounting member 2424 configured in this way is inserted into the right end of the base member 2421, and the tip of the claw portion 2424b engages with the engagement hole 2421e of the base member 2421. As a result, the right side mounting member 2424 is configured to be rotatable integrally with the base member 2421. Further, as shown in FIG. 89, the right end mounting member 2424 is rotatably supported by the right side receiving member 2412 by fitting the right end portion into the recess formed in the right side receiving member 2412.

The light emitting unit 2430 is for irradiating light in the forward direction. The light emitting unit 2430 is housed in the drum body 2420. The light emitting unit 2430 includes a substrate 2431 and an LED 2432.

The substrate 2431 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and the plate surface is arranged so as to face the front-rear direction. The substrate 2431 is arranged inside the reel sheet 2422. The substrate 2431 is arranged behind the shaft member 2414 and is fixed to the shaft member 2414 via the connecting member 2414a. As a result, the substrate 2431 is held by the mounting base 2410 with its plate surface facing in the front-rear direction even when the drum body 2420 rotates (so that it does not rotate integrally with the drum body 2420). ).

The LED 2432 is arranged on the lower left, upper portion (upper portion in the left and right central portions), and lower right portion of the substrate 2431. The LED 2432 is configured to be able to irradiate light in the forward direction by lighting.

The drive transmission mechanism 2440 is for transmitting a drive force to the drum main body 2420. As shown in FIGS. 89 and 97, the drive transmission mechanism 2440 is provided on the left side receiving member 2413. The drive transmission mechanism 2440 includes a motor 2441, an upper gear 2442, and a lower gear 2443.

The motor 2441 is supported on the upper part of the left side receiving member 2413. The motor 2441 is arranged above the accommodating member 2411. The rotation shaft 2441a of the motor 2441 is formed so as to extend to the left from the main body of the motor 2441.

The upper gear 2442 is an external gear fixed to the rotating shaft 2441a of the motor 2441 via the bush 2442a. The upper gear 2442 is arranged above the left side mounting member 2423.

The lower gear 2443 is an external gear rotatably supported by the left receiving member 2413. The lower gear 2443 is arranged between the upper gear 2442 and the left side mounting member 2423, and meshes with the upper gear 2442 and the left side mounting member 2423, respectively.

Next, the operation mode of the effect device 2400 will be described. As an example of the operation mode of the effect device 2400, the player can see the symbol C from an invisible state (a state in which the symbol C is not facing forward) to a visible state (a state in which the symbol C is facing forward). , The operation mode in the case of changing the state will be described.

First, the effect device 2400 lights the LED 2432 and drives the motor 2441. As a result, the power of the motor 2441 is transmitted in the order of the rotating shaft 2441a, the upper gear 2442, the lower gear 2443, and the left side mounting member 2423, and the left side mounting member 2423 rotates in the circumferential direction around the axis thereof. As a result, the drum body 2420 rotates relative to the mounting base 2410 and the light emitting unit 2430.

After that, the effect device 2400 stops the motor 2441. As a result, the effect device 2400 causes the predetermined symbol C (for example, “111” shown in FIG. 92) printed on the reel sheet 2422 to be arranged at the front end portion. As a result, the effect device 2400 displays a predetermined symbol C to the player and transmits the light from the LED 2432 from the reel sheet 2422. In this way, the effect device 2400 gives the player the impression that the predetermined symbol C is emitting light.

As shown in FIG. 96, the drum main body 2420 according to the present embodiment has a first cutout portion 2422a to a third cutout portion 2422c and a first protrusion portion 2421a to a third protrusion portion 2421c, respectively. Engagement. According to this, it is possible to prevent the reel seat 2422 from rotating relative to the base member 2421. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the symbol C displayed to the player from being displaced due to the relative rotation of the reel sheet 2422.

Further, according to the drum main body 2420 according to the present embodiment, since the relative rotation of the reel sheet 2422 can be prevented without using the double-sided tape, the number of parts can be reduced and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Next, the assembling work of the drum main body 2420 will be described.

First, the left side mounting member 2423 is brought into contact with the base member 2421 shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, and the base member 2421 and the left side mounting member 2423 are fixed by screws.

Next, the reel sheet 2422 is rolled up and housed in the base member 2421. At this time, the reel sheet 2422 is rolled so that the ends of the reel sheet 2422 in the circumferential direction overlap each other in the radial direction. As a result, the overlapping portion 2422d is formed. Then, the reel sheet 2422 is inserted into the base member 2421 so that the first notch portion 2422a to the third notch portion 2422c and the first protrusion portion 2421a to the third protrusion portion 2421c are engaged with each other. (See FIG. 96). As a result, the reel seat 2422 is attached to the base member 2421. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first cutout portion 2422a to the third cutout portion 2422c are used as a guideline for the mounting position on the base member 2421.

After that, the left end portion of the right side mounting member 2424 is inserted into the right end portion of the base member 2421, and the claw portion 2424b of the right side mounting member 2424 is engaged with the engaging hole 2421e of the base member 2421. With the above, the assembling work of the drum main body 2420 is completed.

The reel seat 2422 according to the present embodiment can determine (position) a position in the circumferential direction with respect to the base member 2421 with reference to a plurality of cutout portions 2422a to 2422c. According to this, the reel seat 2422 can be positioned with higher accuracy than the case where the reel seat 2422 is positioned with only one notch.

Here, if a plurality of cutout portions 2422a to 2422c (and a plurality of protrusions 2421a to 2421c) are arranged at the same interval in the circumferential direction, the symbol C identifies the base member 2421 at the time of assembly. It may shift in the circumferential direction (rotational direction) with respect to the position of. Specifically, when the first notch 2422a is engaged with the second protrusion 2421b, the second notch 2422b is engaged with the third protrusion 2421c and the third notch 2422c is the third. It engages with the protrusion 2421a of 1. In this case, even if all the cutouts 2422a to 2422c are engaged with all the protrusions 2421a to 2421c, the symbol C (reel sheet 2422) will be displaced by 120 ° from the specific position.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, the distance L1a from the first cutout portion 2422a to the second cutout portion 2422b is the distance L1a from the second cutout portion 2422b to the third cutout portion 2422c. The distance to L2a is different from that of L2a. In this case, unless the notch corresponding to the protrusion (for example, the first notch 2422a corresponding to the first protrusion 2421a) is engaged, all the notches 2422a to 2422c are all the protrusions 2421a to. Cannot engage with 2421c. For example, when the second notch 2422b is to be engaged with the first protrusion 2421a, the positions of the other notches 2422a and 2422c in the circumferential direction are displaced from the other protrusions 2421b and 2421c and are engaged with each other. It becomes impossible to meet.

As described above, even if the reel sheet 2422 according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of notch portions 2422a to 2422c, the reel sheet 2422 has a pattern in which all the notch portions 2422a to 2422c can be engaged with all the protrusions 2421a to 2421c. Can be one. As a result, the reel sheet 2422 can be placed at a specific position of the base member 2421 by simply engaging the first notch portion 2422a to the third notch portion 2422c with the first protrusion 2421a to the third protrusion 2421c. Can be placed with high accuracy. According to this, after the reel seat 2422 is attached to the base member 2421, it is not necessary to realign the attachment position of the reel seat 2422 with respect to the base member 2421.

Further, since the reel sheet 2422 is only housed in the base member 2421 (not attached with double-sided tape), it can be smoothly housed in the base member 2421. Further, when the direction of the reel sheet 2422 is changed after being housed in the base member 2421, it is not necessary to peel off the double-sided tape, and the reel sheet 2422 can be smoothly rotated relative to the base member 2421. Therefore, the efficiency of the work of attaching the reel sheet 2422 to the base member 2421 can be effectively improved.

Further, in the reel sheet 2422, the first cutout portion 2422a to the third cutout portion 2422c are only engaged with the first protrusion portion 2421a to the third protrusion portion 2421c. Therefore, the reel sheet 2422 can be easily taken out by simply pulling it out from the base member 2421. According to this, the detachability between the base member 2421 and the reel seat 2422 can be improved, and the base member 2421 and the reel seat 2422 can be easily reused.

Further, the overlapping portion 2422d of the reel sheet 2422 according to the present embodiment is formed in a portion where the symbol C is not printed. According to this, since the overlapping portion 2422d can be made inconspicuous, the aesthetic appearance can be improved.

The first notch portion 2422a according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the first position specifying means according to the present invention.
Further, the second notch portion 2422b according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the second position specifying means according to the present invention.
Further, the third cutout portion 2422c according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the position specifying means according to the present invention.
Further, the first protrusion 2421a, the second protrusion 2421b, and the third protrusion 2421c according to the present embodiment are one embodiment of the base member engaging portion according to the present invention.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, the type of the gaming machine is a pachinko machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a slot machine or the like may be used.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of protrusions and notches is assumed to be three, but the number of protrusions and notches is not limited to this, and is, for example, two or four or more. May be good. However, from the viewpoint of improving the positioning accuracy, the number of protrusions and notches is preferably three or more. When the number of protrusions and notches is two, the distance from the first notch to the second notch (clockwise distance in FIG. 95) and the distance from the second notch to the first It suffices if the distance to the notch in FIG. 95 (the distance in the clockwise direction in FIG. 95) is different.

Further, the place where the three cutout portions 2422a to 2422c are formed on the reel seat 2422 is not limited to the left end portion. The three notches 2422a to 2422c may be formed, for example, at the right end of the reel sheet 2422. In this case, the three notches 2422a to 2422c may be engaged with the right side mounting member 2424.

Further, the three notches 2422a to 2422c are formed at the left end of the reel seat 2422 (arranged so as to be aligned in the left-right direction), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the left and right portions are not limited to each. It may be offset in the direction.

Further, the reel seat 2422 may be configured to engage with the base member 2421 and the right side mounting member 2424, respectively. In such a case, the reel sheet 2422 is formed with, for example, three notches at the left end and the right end, respectively. Further, the right side mounting member 2424 includes three protrusions that can be engaged with the notch on the right side of the reel seat 2422. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the reel seat 2422 from rotating relative to the base member 2421 at the left end portion and the right end portion of the reel seat 2422. As a result, the relative rotation of the reel seat 2422 with respect to the base member 2421 can be reliably prevented.

Further, in the present embodiment, the reel sheet 2422 is provided with a plurality of notched portions 2422a to 2422c, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the reel sheet 2422 may be provided with a plurality of protrusions. good. In this case, the base member 2421 includes notches that can be engaged with a plurality of protrusions.

Further, the reel sheet 2422 uses three notches 2422a to 2422c as a guideline for the mounting position, but the guideline for the mounting position is not limited to the notch portion, and a plurality of printed parts printed on the outer peripheral surface of the reel sheet 2422. It may be a mark of. In this case, the plurality of marks function as the position specifying means according to the present invention.

Further, the configuration of the drum main body 2420 is not limited to the present embodiment, and for example, the configuration of the drum main body 2520 according to the modification shown in FIGS. 98 and 99 can be used.

The drum main body 2520 according to the modified example has a different configuration of the base member 2521 and the left side mounting member 2523 from the drum main body 2420 according to the present embodiment. The base member 2521 includes an opening 2521f in addition to the configuration of the base member 2421 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the opening 2521f is formed in the rear upper part of the bottom surface of the base member 2521 and penetrates the bottom surface of the base member 2521 in the left-right direction. The opening 2521f is formed so that its radial width (thickness) gradually narrows (in a tapered shape) toward the right.

As shown in FIGS. 98 and 99, the left side mounting member 2523 includes a holding portion 2523c in addition to the configuration of the left side mounting member 2423 according to the present embodiment. The pressing portion 2523c is formed so as to extend in the circumferential direction of the left side mounting member 2523. The pressing portion 2523c is formed on the rear upper portion of the right side surface of the left side mounting member 2523. The pressing portion 2523c projects to the right from the right side surface of the left side mounting member 2523. The pressing portion 2523c is formed so that its radial width (thickness) gradually narrows (in a tapered shape) toward the right. As shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the holding portion 2523c is inserted through the opening 2521f of the base member 2521. The pressing portion 2523c is arranged slightly inside the inner peripheral surface of the base member 2521 (about twice the thickness of the reel sheet 2422) in the radial direction.

In the modified example, when the reel seat 2422 is housed in the base member 2521, the overlapping portion 2422d is arranged between the inner peripheral surface of the base member 2521 and the holding portion 2523c of the left side mounting member 2523. The overlapping portion 2422d is pressed against the inner peripheral surface of the base member 2421 by the pressing portion 2523c.

With this configuration, the overlapping portion 2422d can be held by the pressing portion 2523c. As a result, it is possible to prevent the overlapping portion 2422d (the end portion of the reel sheet 2422 in the circumferential direction) from being deformed so as to warp inward in the radial direction to form a gap. According to this, it is possible to prevent light from leaking from the gap. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the aesthetic appearance from being spoiled.

Hereinafter, the configuration of the effect device 3400 according to the second embodiment of the first movable accessory unit will be described in detail.

The effect device 3400 shown in FIG. 101 is a device for giving a visual impression (impact) to the player by rotating a drum-shaped accessory (drum body 3420 described later). As shown in FIGS. 101 to 103, the effect device 3400 includes a mounting base 3410, a drum main body 3420, a light emitting unit 3430, and a drive transmission mechanism 3440.

The mounting base 3410 supports the drum body 3420 and the like, which will be described later. The mounting base 3410 includes an accommodating member 3411, a right receiving member 3412, a left receiving member 3413, and a shaft member 3414.

The accommodating member 3411 is for accommodating the drum body 3420 and the like. The accommodating member 3411 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with a bottom whose axial direction is directed to the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the accommodating member 3411 is arranged on the right side, and the left portion and the front portion thereof open. The accommodating member 3411 is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the stage 42 via a decorative member or the like of the effect device 3400.

The right receiving member 3412 is for supporting the right end portion of the drum main body 3420. The right receiving member 3412 is formed in a substantially disk shape. The right receiving member 3412 is formed so that its outer diameter is large enough to be accommodated in the accommodating member 3411. The right receiving member 3412 is fixed to the bottom surface (right end portion) of the accommodating member 3411 by a screw and is accommodated in the accommodating member 3411.

The left receiving member 3413 is for supporting the left end portion of the drum main body 3420. The left side receiving member 3413 is formed in a substantially plate shape with its plate surface oriented in the left-right direction. The left side receiving member 3413 is formed so that its width in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the accommodating member 3411. Further, the left side receiving member 3413 is formed so that its vertical width is wider than the vertical width of the accommodating member 3411. The lower part of the right side surface of the left side receiving member 3413 is recessed to the left except for a part. The lower portion of the left receiving member 3413 is fixed to the left end portion of the accommodating member 3411 by a screw. The left side receiving member 3413 includes an outer protruding portion 3413a and an inner protruding portion 3413b.

The outer protruding portion 3413a is formed in the lower portion (recessed portion) of the right side surface of the left side receiving member 3413. The outer protruding portion 3413a projects to the right from the right side surface of the left side receiving member 3413. The outer protrusion 3413a is formed in a substantially annular shape in a lateral view.

The inner protruding portion 3413b projects to the right from the center of the outer protruding portion 3413a. The medial protrusion 3413b is formed in a substantially annular shape in a lateral view. Further, the inner edge portion of the inner protruding portion 3413b is formed in a substantially hexagonal shape in a side view.

As shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, the shaft member 3414 is a substantially hexagonal columnar member whose axial direction is directed to the left-right direction. The left end of the shaft member 3414 is supported by the inner protrusion 3413b. The right end of the shaft member 3414 is supported by the bottom surface of the accommodating member 3411 and the right receiving member 3412. The shaft member 3414 supports a light emitting unit 3430, which will be described later, via a connecting member 3414a attached to the left and right halfway portions thereof.

The drum body 3420 is a member for rotating the symbol C. As shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, the drum main body 3420 includes a base member 3421, a reel seat 3422, a left side mounting member 3423, and a right side mounting member 3424.

The base member 3421 is for accommodating the reel seat 3422, which will be described later. The base member 3421 is formed in a hollow substantially truncated cone shape with its axial direction directed to the left and right. The base member 3421 is formed so that its outer diameter and inner diameter gradually decrease from the right end portion to the left end portion. The base member 3421 is formed so that the outer diameter of the right end portion thereof is large enough to be accommodated in the accommodating member 3411 (see FIG. 101). The left portion of the base member 3421 is closed and the right portion is opened. The base member 3421 is made of a transparent resin material so that the inside can be visually recognized. As shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the base member 3421 includes a first protrusion 3421a, a second protrusion 3421b, a third protrusion 3421c, a through hole 3421d, and an engagement hole 3421e.

The first protrusion 3421a projects radially inward from the inner peripheral surface of the base member 3421. The first protrusion 3421a is arranged at the left end of the base member 3421 and is formed so as to be connected to the bottom surface of the base member 3421. In this way, the first protrusion 3421a is formed so as to project to the right from the bottom surface of the base member 3421. The first protrusion 3421a is formed in a substantially quadrangular side view. The first protrusion 3421a is formed at the rear end of the bottom surface of the base member 3421 (at the 3 o'clock position of the clock in FIG. 107).

The second protrusion 3421b is formed in substantially the same shape as the first protrusion 3421a. The second protrusions 3421b are arranged at intervals in the circumferential direction of the base member 3421 with respect to the first protrusions 3421a. The second protrusion 3421b is formed on the front upper portion of the bottom surface of the base member 3421 (the position between 10 o'clock and 11 o'clock in FIG. 107).

The third protrusion 3421c is formed so as to be vertically symmetrical with respect to the second protrusion 3421b with reference to the upper and lower center portions of the base member 3421. The third protrusion 3421c is formed at the lower front part of the bottom surface of the base member 3421 (the position between 7 o'clock and 8 o'clock in FIG. 107).

The through hole 3421d is a side view substantially circular hole formed on the bottom surface of the base member 3421. The through hole 3421d has an inner diameter through which the shaft member 3414 can be inserted. The through hole 3421d penetrates the center of the bottom surface of the base member 3421 in the left-right direction.

The engaging hole 3421e is a substantially quadrangular hole formed at the right end portion of the base member 3421. The engaging hole 3421e penetrates the base member 3421 in the radial direction from the outer peripheral surface to the inner peripheral surface. A plurality of engagement holes 3421e (three in this embodiment) are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction.

As shown in FIG. 101, the base member 3421 configured in this way is attached to the accommodating member 3411 via the left side attachment member 3423 or the like, which will be described later. As a result, the base member 3421 is housed in the housing member 3411 so that the player can see it from the front. Further, as shown in FIG. 102, the shaft member 3414 is inserted into the through hole 3421d of the base member 3421. The base member 3421 is provided on the mounting base 3410 so as to be rotatable relative to the shaft member 3414.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the reel sheet 3422 is a member on which the symbol C is printed on the outer peripheral surface. The symbol C enhances the interest of the player by making the player visually recognize or not visually in the game production. In this embodiment, a plurality of symbols such as a number symbol of "111" and a character symbol of "HIT" are adopted as the symbol C. Further, the symbol C is appropriately omitted in the drawings except the exploded perspective views (FIGS. 105, 106 and 111) in order to make it easier to see the other members.
The reel seat 3422 is formed by rolling a sheet-shaped member. The reel sheet 3422 is formed so that its outer peripheral shape is substantially the same as the inner peripheral shape of the base member 3421. The reel seat 3422 is formed so that its lateral width is shorter than the lateral width of the base member 3421. On the outer peripheral surface of the reel sheet 3422, a paint that transmits light is applied to a portion corresponding to the symbol C, and a paint that does not transmit light (shields light) is applied to the other portion. As a result, the reel sheet 3422 is configured to be capable of transmitting light in the portion where the symbol C is printed, and is configured to be opaque to light in the portion where the symbol C is not printed. As shown in FIGS. 106 and 108, the reel seat 3422 includes a first notch 3422a, a second notch 3422b, a third notch 3422c and a superposed 3422d.

The first notch 3422a is formed at the left rear end of the reel seat 3422. The first notch 3422a is formed in a substantially arc shape. The first notch 3422a corresponds to the first protrusion 3421a of the base member 3421. That is, the first notch 3422a is configured to be engageable with the first protrusion 3421a.

The second notch 3422b is formed so as to have substantially the same shape as the first notch 3422a. The second notch 3422b is arranged at intervals in the circumferential direction of the reel seat 3422 with respect to the first notch 3422a. The second notch 3422b is formed in the front upper portion at the left end of the reel seat 3422. The second notch 3422b corresponds to the second protrusion 3421b. That is, the second notch 3422b is configured to be engageable with the second protrusion 3421b.

The third notch portion 3422c is formed so as to be vertically symmetrical with respect to the second notch portion 3422b with reference to the upper and lower central portions of the reel seat 3422. The third notch 3422c is formed in the lower front part at the left end of the reel seat 3422. The third notch 3422c corresponds to the third protrusion 3421c. That is, the third notch 3422c is configured to be engageable with the third protrusion 3421c.

The clockwise distance L1b from the first notch 3422a to the second notch 3422b in FIG. 108 is the clockwise distance in FIG. 108 from the second notch 3422b to the third notch 3422c. It is formed so as to be longer than the distance L2b of.

The overlapping portion 3422d is a portion (one end portion and the other end portion in the circumferential direction) where the reel seats 3422 overlap in the radial direction. The overlapping portion 3422d is formed from the left end portion to the right end portion of the reel sheet 3422. The overlapping portion 3422d is formed in a portion where the design C is not printed. Further, the overlapping portion 3422d is formed in a portion where the first cutout portion 3422a, the second cutout portion 3422b, and the third cutout portion 3422c are not formed. The overlapping portion 3422d according to the present embodiment is formed on the rear upper portion of the reel sheet 3422.

The reel seat 3422 configured in this way is housed in the base member 3421 as shown in FIGS. 106 and 109. At this time, the first notch 3422a engages with the first protrusion 3421a. Further, the second notch portion 3422b engages with the second protrusion portion 3421b. Further, the third notch portion 3422c engages with the third protrusion portion 3421c. As described above, the reel seat 3422 is configured such that the symbol C is arranged at a specific position of the base member 3421 and is rotatable integrally with the base member 3421. Further, the symbol C of the reel sheet 3422 can be visually recognized from the outside of the base member 3421 in a state where the reel sheet 3422 is housed in the base member 3421.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the left side mounting member 3423 is an external gear for rotating the base member 3421. The left side mounting member 3423 includes a recess 3423a and a through hole 3423b.

The recess 3423a is a substantially circular recess formed on the left side surface of the left side mounting member 3423. The recess 3423a is formed so as to have an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the outer protrusion 3413a of the left side receiving member 3413 (see FIG. 110).

The through hole 3423b is a hole that penetrates the center of the left side mounting member 3423 in the left-right direction. The through hole 3423b is formed in a substantially circular shape with an inner diameter through which the shaft member 3414 can be inserted.

The left side mounting member 3423 configured in this way is fixed to the bottom surface (left end portion) of the base member 3421 by screws. As a result, the left side mounting member 3423 is configured to be rotatable integrally with the base member 3421. Further, as shown in FIGS. 102 and 110, the left side mounting member 3423 is supported by the left side receiving member 3413 so as to be relatively rotatable by fitting the recess 3423a into the outer protrusion 3413a of the left side receiving member 3413. Further, the shaft member 3414 is inserted into the through hole 3423b of the left side mounting member 3423. As a result, the left side mounting member 3423 is provided on the mounting base 3410 so as to be rotatable relative to the shaft member 3414.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the right side mounting member 3424 is a substantially annular member attached to the right end of the base member 3421. The right side mounting member 3424 is formed so that the outer diameter of the left end portion thereof is smaller than the inner diameter of the right end portion of the base member 3421. The right side mounting member 3424 includes a flange portion 3424a and a claw portion 3424b.

The flange portion 3424a is formed in the middle left and right of the right side mounting member 3424. The flange portion 3424a is formed so that its outer diameter is larger than the inner diameter of the right end portion of the base member 3421 and smaller than the outer diameter of the right end portion of the base member 3421.

The claw portion 3424b is formed at the left end portion of the right side mounting member 3424. The tip of the claw portion 3424b projects radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the right side mounting member 3424. A plurality of claw portions 3424b are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction. More specifically, three claw portions 3424b are formed at intervals substantially the same as the circumferential spacing of the engaging holes 3421e of the base member 3421.

The left end of the right side mounting member 3424 configured as described above is inserted into the right end of the base member 3421, and the tip of the claw portion 3424b engages with the engagement hole 3421e of the base member 3421. As a result, the right side mounting member 3424 is configured to be rotatable integrally with the base member 3421. Further, as shown in FIG. 102, the right end portion of the right side mounting member 3424 is rotatably supported by the right side receiving member 3412 by being fitted into a recess formed in the right side receiving member 3412.

The light emitting unit 3430 is for irradiating light in the forward direction. The light emitting unit 3430 is housed in the drum body 3420. The light emitting unit 3430 includes a substrate 3431 and an LED 3432.

The substrate 3431 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and the plate surface thereof is arranged in the front-rear direction. The substrate 3431 is arranged inside the reel sheet 3422. The substrate 3431 is arranged behind the shaft member 3414 and is fixed to the shaft member 3414 via the connecting member 3414a. As a result, the substrate 3431 is held by the mounting base 3410 with its plate surface facing in the front-rear direction even when the drum main body 3420 rotates (so as not to rotate integrally with the drum main body 3420). ).

The LED 3432 is arranged at the lower left, the upper part (the upper part in the left and right central part), and the lower right part of the substrate 3431. The LED 3432 is configured to be able to irradiate light in the forward direction by lighting.

The drive transmission mechanism 3440 is for transmitting a drive force to the drum main body 3420. As shown in FIGS. 102 and 110, the drive transmission mechanism 3440 is provided on the left side receiving member 3413. The drive transmission mechanism 3440 includes a motor 3441, an upper gear 3442, and a lower gear 3443.

The motor 3441 is supported on the upper part of the left side receiving member 3413. The motor 3441 is arranged above the accommodating member 3411. The rotation shaft 3441a of the motor 3441 is formed so as to extend to the left from the main body of the motor 3441.

The upper gear 3442 is an external gear fixed to the rotating shaft 3441a of the motor 3441 via the bush 3442a. The upper gear 3442 is located above the left side mounting member 3423.

The lower gear 3443 is an external gear rotatably supported by the left receiving member 3413. The lower gear 3443 is arranged between the upper gear 3442 and the left side mounting member 3423, and meshes with the upper gear 3442 and the left side mounting member 3423, respectively.

Next, the operation mode of the effect device 3400 will be described. As an example of the operation mode of the effect device 3400, the player can see the symbol C from an invisible state (a state in which the symbol C is not facing forward) to a visible state (a state in which the symbol C is facing forward). , The operation mode in the case of changing the state will be described.

First, the effect device 3400 lights the LED 3432 and drives the motor 3441. As a result, the power of the motor 3441 is transmitted in the order of the rotating shaft 3441a, the upper gear 3442, the lower gear 3443, and the left side mounting member 3423, and the left side mounting member 3423 rotates in the circumferential direction around the axis thereof. As a result, the drum body 3420 rotates relative to the mounting base 3410 and the light emitting unit 3430.

After that, the effect device 3400 stops the motor 3441. As a result, the effect device 3400 causes the predetermined symbol C (for example, “111” shown in FIG. 105) printed on the reel sheet 3422 to be arranged at the front end portion. As a result, the effect device 3400 displays a predetermined symbol C to the player and transmits the light from the LED 3432 from the reel sheet 3422. In this way, the effect device 3400 gives the player the impression that the predetermined symbol C is emitting light.

As shown in FIG. 109, the drum main body 3420 according to the present embodiment has a first notch 3422a to a third notch 3422c and a first protrusion 3421a to a third protrusion 3421c, respectively. Engagement. According to this, it is possible to prevent the reel seat 3422 from rotating relative to the base member 3421. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the symbol C displayed to the player from being displaced due to the relative rotation of the reel sheet 3422.

Further, according to the drum main body 3420 according to the present embodiment, since the relative rotation of the reel sheet 3422 can be prevented without using the double-sided tape, the number of parts can be reduced and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Next, the assembling work of the drum main body 3420 will be described.

First, the reel seats 3422 shown in FIGS. 105 and 106 are rolled up and housed in the base member 3421. At this time, the reel sheet 3422 is rolled so that the ends of the reel sheet 3422 in the circumferential direction overlap each other in the radial direction. As a result, the overlapping portion 3422d is formed. Then, the reel sheet 3422 is inserted into the base member 3421 so that the first notch 3422a to the third notch 3422c and the first protrusion 3421a to the third protrusion 3421c are engaged with each other. (See FIG. 109). As a result, the reel seat 3422 is attached to the base member 3421. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first cutout portion 3422a to the third cutout portion 3422c are used as a guideline for the mounting position on the base member 3421.

Next, the left side mounting member 3423 is brought into contact with the base member 3421, and the base member 3421 and the left side mounting member 3423 are fixed by screws.

After that, the left end portion of the right side mounting member 3424 is inserted into the right end portion of the base member 3421, and the claw portion 3424b of the right side mounting member 3424 is engaged with the engaging hole 3421e of the base member 3421. With the above, the assembling work of the drum main body 3420 is completed.

The reel seat 3422 according to the present embodiment can determine (position) a position in the circumferential direction with respect to the base member 3421 with reference to a plurality of notched portions 3422a to 3422c. According to this, the reel seat 3422 can be positioned with higher accuracy than the case where the reel seat 3422 is positioned with only one notch.

Here, if a plurality of notches 3422a to 3422c (and a plurality of protrusions 3421a to 3421c) are arranged at the same interval in the circumferential direction, the symbol C identifies the base member 3421 at the time of assembly. It may shift in the circumferential direction (rotational direction) with respect to the position of. Specifically, when the first notch 3422a is engaged with the second protrusion 3421b, the second notch 3422b is engaged with the third protrusion 3421c and the third notch 3422c is engaged with the third protrusion 3422c. It engages with the protrusion 3421a of 1. In this case, even if all the cutouts 3422a to 3422c are engaged with all the protrusions 3421a to 3421c, the symbol C (reel sheet 3422) will be displaced by 120 ° from the specific position.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 108, the distance L1b from the first notch 3422a to the second notch 3422b is the distance L1b from the second notch 3422b to the third notch 3422c. The distance to L2b is different from that of L2b. In this case, unless the notch corresponding to the protrusion (for example, the first notch 3422a corresponding to the first protrusion 3421a) is engaged, all the notches 3422a to 3422c are all the protrusions 3421a to. Cannot engage with 3421c. For example, when the second notch 3422b is to be engaged with the first protrusion 3421a, the positions of the other notches 3422a and 3422c in the circumferential direction are displaced from the other protrusions 3421b and 3421c and are engaged with each other. It becomes impossible to meet.

As described above, even if the reel seat 3422 according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of notch portions 3422a to 3422c, the reel sheet 3422 has a pattern in which all the notch portions 3422a to 3422c can be engaged with all the protrusions 3421a to 3421c. Can be one. As a result, the reel seat 3422 can be placed at a specific position of the base member 3421 by simply engaging the first notch 3422a to the third notch 3422c with the first protrusion 3421a to the third protrusion 3421c. Can be placed with high accuracy. According to this, after the reel seat 3422 is attached to the base member 3421, it is not necessary to realign the attachment position of the reel seat 3422 with respect to the base member 3421.

Further, since the reel sheet 3422 is only housed in the base member 3421 (not attached with double-sided tape), it can be smoothly housed in the base member 3421. Further, when the direction of the reel sheet 3422 is changed after being housed in the base member 3421, it is not necessary to peel off the double-sided tape, and the reel sheet 3422 can be smoothly rotated relative to the base member 3421. Therefore, the efficiency of the work of attaching the reel seat 3422 to the base member 3421 can be effectively improved.

Further, in the reel sheet 3422, the first notch 3422a to the third notch 3422c are only engaged with the first protrusion 3421a to the third protrusion 3421c. Therefore, the reel sheet 3422 can be easily taken out by simply pulling it out from the base member 3421. According to this, the detachability between the base member 3421 and the reel seat 3422 can be improved, and the base member 3421 and the reel seat 3422 can be easily reused.

Further, the overlapping portion 3422d of the reel sheet 3422 according to the present embodiment is formed in a portion where the symbol C is not printed. According to this, since the overlapping portion 3422d can be made inconspicuous, the aesthetic appearance can be improved.

The three protrusions 3421a to 3421c according to the present embodiment are one embodiment of the base member engaging portion according to the present invention.
Further, the three cutout portions 3422a to 3422c according to the present embodiment are one embodiment of the reel seat engaging portion according to the present invention.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, the type of the gaming machine is a pachinko machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a slot machine or the like may be used.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of protrusions and notches is assumed to be three, but the number of protrusions and notches is not limited to this, and is, for example, one or four or more. May be good. However, from the viewpoint of improving the positioning accuracy, the number of protrusions and notches is preferably three or more.

Further, the three protrusions 3421a to 3421c and the three notches 3422a to 3422c may be arranged at the same interval in the rotation direction of the drum main body 3420.

Further, the place where the three cutout portions 3422a to 3422c are formed on the reel seat 3422 is not limited to the left end portion. The three notches 3422a to 3422c may be formed, for example, at the right end of the reel seat 3422. In this case, the three protrusions 3421a to 3421c are formed on the right side of the inner peripheral surface of the base member 3421.

Further, the three notches 3422a to 3422c are formed at the left end of the reel seat 3422 (arranged so as to be aligned in the left-right direction), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the left and right portions are not limited to each. It may be offset in the direction.

Further, the reel seat 3422 may be configured to engage with the base member 3421 and the right side mounting member 3424, respectively. In such a case, the reel sheet 3422 is formed with, for example, three notches at the left end and the right end, respectively. Further, the right side mounting member 3424 includes three protrusions that can be engaged with the notch on the right side of the reel seat 3422. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the reel seat 3422 from rotating relative to the base member 3421 at the left end portion and the right end portion of the reel seat 3422. This makes it possible to reliably prevent the reel seat 3422 from rotating relative to the base member 3421.

Further, in the present embodiment, the reel sheet 3422 is provided with a plurality of notches 3422a to 3422c, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the reel sheet 3422 may be provided with a plurality of protrusions. good. In this case, the base member 3421 includes notches that can engage with the plurality of protrusions.

Further, the base member 3421 is assumed to be entirely formed of a transparent resin material, but the base member 3421 is not limited to this. The base member 3421 may be such that the symbol C can be visually recognized from the outside. That is, at least a part of the outer peripheral surface of the base member 3421 may be transparent. Specifically, the base member 3421 may have, for example, half of the outer peripheral surface formed of a transparent resin material.

Further, the configuration of the drum main body 3420 is not limited to the present embodiment, and for example, the configuration of the drum main body 3520 according to the modification shown in FIGS. 111 and 112 can be used.

The drum main body 3520 according to the modified example has a different configuration of the base member 3521 and the left side mounting member 3523 from the drum main body 3420 according to the present embodiment. The base member 3521 includes an opening 3521f in addition to the configuration of the base member 3421 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, the opening 3521f is formed in the rear upper part of the bottom surface of the base member 3521 and penetrates the bottom surface of the base member 3521 in the left-right direction. The opening 3521f is formed so that its radial width (thickness) gradually narrows (in a tapered shape) toward the right.

As shown in FIGS. 111 and 112, the left side mounting member 3523 includes a holding portion 3523c in addition to the configuration of the left side mounting member 3423 according to the present embodiment. The pressing portion 3523c is formed so as to extend in the circumferential direction of the left side mounting member 3523. The pressing portion 3523c is formed on the rear upper portion of the right side surface of the left side mounting member 3523. The pressing portion 3523c projects to the right from the right side surface of the left side mounting member 3523. The pressing portion 3523c is formed so that its radial width (thickness) gradually narrows (in a tapered shape) toward the right. As shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, the pressing portion 3523c is inserted through the opening portion 3521f of the base member 3521. The pressing portion 3523c is arranged slightly inside the inner peripheral surface of the base member 3521 (about twice the thickness of the reel sheet 3422) in the radial direction.

In the modified example, when the reel seat 3422 is housed in the base member 3521, the overlapping portion 3422d is arranged between the inner peripheral surface of the base member 3521 and the holding portion 3523c of the left side mounting member 3523. The overlapping portion 3422d is pressed against the inner peripheral surface of the base member 3421 by the pressing portion 3523c.

With this configuration, the overlapping portion 3422d can be held by the pressing portion 3523c. As a result, it is possible to prevent the overlapping portion 3422d (the end portion of the reel sheet 3422 in the circumferential direction) from being deformed so as to warp inward in the radial direction to form a gap. According to this, it is possible to prevent light from leaking from the gap. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the aesthetic appearance from being spoiled.

Hereinafter, the configuration of the effect device 4400 according to the third embodiment of the first movable accessory unit will be described in detail.

The effect device 4400 shown in FIG. 114 is a device for giving a visual impression (impact) to the player by rotating a drum-shaped accessory (drum body 4420 described later). As shown in FIGS. 114 to 116, the effect device 4400 includes a mounting base 4410, a drum body 4420, a light emitting unit 4430, and a drive transmission mechanism 4440.

The mounting base 4410 supports the drum body 4420 and the like, which will be described later. The mounting base 4410 includes an accommodating member 4411, a right receiving member 4412, a left receiving member 4413, and a shaft member 4414.

The accommodating member 4411 is for accommodating the drum body 4420 and the like. The accommodating member 4411 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with a bottom whose axial direction is directed to the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the accommodating member 4411 is arranged on the right side, and the left portion and the front portion thereof open. The accommodating member 4411 is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the stage 42 via a decorative member or the like of the effect device 4400.

The right receiving member 4412 is for supporting the right end portion of the drum main body 4420. The right receiving member 4412 is formed in a substantially disk shape. The right receiving member 4412 is formed so that its outer diameter is large enough to be accommodated in the accommodating member 4411. The right receiving member 4412 is fixed to the bottom surface (right end portion) of the accommodating member 4411 by a screw and is accommodated in the accommodating member 4411.

The left side receiving member 4413 is for supporting the left end portion of the drum main body 4420. The left side receiving member 4413 is formed in a substantially plate shape with its plate surface oriented in the left-right direction. The left side receiving member 4413 is formed so that its width in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the accommodating member 4411. Further, the left side receiving member 4413 is formed so that its vertical width is wider than the vertical width of the accommodating member 4411. The lower part of the right side surface of the left side receiving member 4413 is recessed to the left except for a part. The lower portion of the left receiving member 4413 is fixed to the left end portion of the accommodating member 4411 by a screw. The left side receiving member 4413 includes an outer protrusion 4413a and an inner protrusion 4413b.

The outer protruding portion 4413a is formed in the lower portion (recessed portion) of the right side surface of the left side receiving member 4413. The outer protruding portion 4413a projects to the right from the right side surface of the left side receiving member 4413. The outer protrusion 4413a is formed in a substantially annular shape in a lateral view.

The inner protrusion 4413b projects to the right from the center of the outer protrusion 4413a. The medial protrusion 4413b is formed in a substantially annular shape in a lateral view. Further, the inner edge portion of the inner protruding portion 4413b is formed in a substantially hexagonal shape in a side view.

As shown in FIGS. 115 and 116, the shaft member 4414 is a substantially hexagonal columnar member whose axial direction is directed to the left-right direction. The left end of the shaft member 4414 is supported by the inner protrusion 4413b. The right end of the shaft member 4414 is supported by the bottom surface of the accommodating member 4411 and the right receiving member 4412. The shaft member 4414 supports a light emitting unit 4430, which will be described later, via a connecting member 4414a attached to the left and right halfway portions thereof.

The drum body 4420 is a member for rotating the symbol C. As shown in FIGS. 117 to 119, the drum body 4420 includes a base member 4421, a reel seat 4422, a left side mounting member 4423, and a right side mounting member 4424.

The base member 4421 is for accommodating the reel seat 4422 described later. The base member 4421 is formed in a hollow substantially truncated cone shape with its axial direction directed to the left and right. The base member 4421 is formed so that its outer diameter and inner diameter gradually decrease from the right end portion to the left end portion. The base member 4421 is formed so that the outer diameter of the right end portion thereof is large enough to be accommodated in the accommodating member 4411 (see FIG. 114). The left portion of the base member 4421 is closed and the right portion is opened. The base member 4421 is made of a transparent resin material so that the inside can be visually recognized. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the base member 4421 includes a first protrusion 4421a, a second protrusion 4421b, a third protrusion 4421c, a through hole 4421d, an engagement hole 4421e, and an opening 4421f. do.

The first protrusion 4421a projects radially inward from the inner peripheral surface of the base member 4421. The first protrusion 4421a is arranged at the left end of the base member 4421 and is formed so as to be connected to the bottom surface of the base member 4421. In this way, the first protrusion 4421a is formed so as to project to the right from the bottom surface of the base member 4421. The first protrusion 4421a is formed in a substantially quadrangular side view. The first protrusion 4421a is formed at the rear end of the bottom surface of the base member 4421 (at the 3 o'clock position of the clock in FIG. 120).

The second protrusion 4421b is formed in substantially the same shape as the first protrusion 4421a. The second protrusions 4421b are arranged at intervals in the circumferential direction of the base member 4421 with respect to the first protrusions 4421a. The second protrusion 4421b is formed on the front upper portion of the bottom surface of the base member 4421 (the position between 10 o'clock and 11 o'clock in FIG. 120).

The third protrusion 4421c is formed so as to be vertically symmetrical with respect to the second protrusion 4421b with reference to the upper and lower central portions of the base member 4421. The third protrusion 4421c is formed at the lower front part of the bottom surface of the base member 4421 (the position between 7 o'clock and 8 o'clock in FIG. 120).

The through hole 4421d is a side view substantially circular hole formed on the bottom surface of the base member 4421. The through hole 4421d has an inner diameter through which the shaft member 4414 can be inserted. The through hole 4421d penetrates the center of the bottom surface of the base member 4421 in the left-right direction.

The engaging hole 4421e is a substantially quadrangular hole formed at the right end portion of the base member 4421. The engaging hole 4421e penetrates the base member 4421 in the radial direction from the outer peripheral surface to the inner peripheral surface. A plurality of (three in this embodiment) engaging holes 4421e are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction.

The opening 4421f is a hole formed so as to extend in the circumferential direction of the base member 4421. The opening 4421f is formed in the rear upper part of the bottom surface of the base member 4421. The opening 4421f penetrates the bottom surface of the base member 4421 in the left-right direction. The opening 4421f is formed so that its radial width (thickness) gradually narrows (in a tapered shape) toward the right (see FIG. 124).

As shown in FIG. 114, the base member 4421 configured in this way is attached to the accommodating member 4411 via the left side attachment member 4423 or the like, which will be described later. As a result, the base member 4421 is housed in the housing member 4411 so that the player can see it from the front. Further, as shown in FIG. 115, the shaft member 4414 is inserted into the through hole 4421d of the base member 4421. The base member 4421 is provided on the mounting base 4410 so as to be rotatable relative to the shaft member 4414.

As shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, the reel sheet 4422 is a member on which the symbol C is printed on the outer peripheral surface. The symbol C enhances the interest of the player by making the player visually recognize or not visually in the game production. In this embodiment, a plurality of symbols such as a number symbol of "111" and a character symbol of "HIT" are adopted as the symbol C. Further, the symbol C is appropriately omitted in the drawings except the exploded perspective views (FIGS. 118 and 119) in order to make it easier to see the other members.
The reel seat 4422 is formed by rolling a sheet-shaped member. The reel sheet 4422 is formed so that its outer peripheral shape is substantially the same as the inner peripheral shape of the base member 4421. The reel seat 4422 is formed so that its lateral width is shorter than the lateral width of the base member 4421. The reel sheet 4422 is coated with a paint that transmits light on a portion of the outer peripheral surface corresponding to the symbol C, and a paint that does not transmit (shields) light on other portions. As a result, the reel sheet 4422 is configured to be capable of transmitting light in the portion where the symbol C is printed, and is configured to be opaque to light in the portion where the symbol C is not printed. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 121, the reel sheet 4422 includes a first notch 4422a, a second notch 4422b, a third notch 4422c and a superposed 4422d.

The first notch 4422a is formed at the left rear end of the reel seat 4422. The first notch 4422a is formed in a substantially arc shape. The first notch 4422a corresponds to the first protrusion 4421a of the base member 4421. That is, the first notch 4422a is configured to be engageable with the first protrusion 4421a.

The second notch 4422b is formed so as to have substantially the same shape as the first notch 4422a. The second notch 4422b is arranged at intervals in the circumferential direction of the reel seat 4422 with respect to the first notch 4422a. The second notch 4422b is formed in the front upper portion at the left end of the reel seat 4422. The second notch 4422b corresponds to the second protrusion 4421b. That is, the second notch 4422b is configured to be engageable with the second protrusion 4421b.

The third notch portion 4422c is formed so as to be vertically symmetrical with respect to the second notch portion 4422b with reference to the upper and lower central portions of the reel seat 4422. The third notch 4422c is formed in the lower front part at the left end of the reel seat 4422. The third notch 4422c corresponds to the third protrusion 4421c. That is, the third notch 4422c is configured to be engageable with the third protrusion 4421c.

The clockwise distance L1c from the first notch 4422a to the second notch 4422b in FIG. 121 is the clockwise distance in FIG. 121 from the second notch 4422b to the third notch 4422c. It is formed so as to be longer than the distance L2c of.

The overlapping portion 4422d is a portion (one end portion and the other end portion in the circumferential direction) where the reel sheets 4422 overlap in the radial direction. The overlapping portion 4422d is formed from the left end portion to the right end portion of the reel sheet 4422. The overlapping portion 4422d is formed in a portion where the design C is not printed. Further, the overlapping portion 4422d is formed in a portion where the first cutout portion 4422a, the second cutout portion 4422b and the third cutout portion 4422c are not formed. The overlapping portion 4422d according to the present embodiment is formed on the rear upper portion of the reel sheet 4422.

The reel seat 4422 configured in this way is housed in the base member 4421 as shown in FIGS. 119 and 122. At this time, the first notch 4422a engages with the first protrusion 4421a. Further, the second notch 4422b engages with the second protrusion 4421b. Further, the third notch portion 4422c engages with the third protrusion portion 4421c. As described above, the reel seat 4422 is configured such that the symbol C is arranged at a specific position of the base member 4421 and is rotatable integrally with the base member 4421. Further, the symbol C of the reel sheet 4422 can be visually recognized from the outside of the base member 4421 in a state where the reel sheet 4422 is housed in the base member 4421.

As shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, the left side mounting member 4423 is an external gear for rotating the base member 4421. The left side mounting member 4423 includes a recess 4423a, a through hole 4423b, and a holding portion 4423c.

The recess 4423a is a substantially circular recess formed on the left side surface of the left side mounting member 4423. The recess 4423a is formed so as to have an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the outer protrusion 4413a of the left side receiving member 4413 (see FIG. 123).

The through hole 4423b is a hole that penetrates the center of the left side mounting member 4423 in the left-right direction. The through hole 4423b is formed in a substantially circular shape with an inner diameter through which the shaft member 4414 can be inserted.

The pressing portion 4423c projects to the right from the right side surface of the left side mounting member 4423. The pressing portion 4423c is formed on the rear upper portion of the right side surface of the left side mounting member 4423. The pressing portion 4423c is formed so as to extend in the circumferential direction of the left side mounting member 4423 (in a substantially arc shape in a side view). The pressing portion 4423c is formed so that its radial width (thickness) gradually narrows (in a tapered shape) toward the right (see FIG. 124). The pressing portion 4423c is formed so as to be insertable into the opening 4421f of the base member 4421.

The left side mounting member 4423 configured in this way is fixed to the bottom surface (left end portion) of the base member 4421 by screws. As a result, the left side mounting member 4423 is configured to be rotatable integrally with the base member 4421. Further, as shown in FIGS. 115 and 123, the left side mounting member 4423 is supported by the left side receiving member 4413 so as to be relatively rotatable by fitting the recess 4423a into the outer protrusion 4413a of the left side receiving member 4413. Further, the shaft member 4414 is inserted into the through hole 4423b of the left side mounting member 4423. As a result, the left side mounting member 4423 is provided on the mounting base 4410 so as to be rotatable relative to the shaft member 4414.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 122 and 124, the pressing portion 4423c is inserted through the opening portion 4421f of the base member 4421. The pressing portion 4423c is arranged slightly inside the inner peripheral surface of the base member 4421 (about twice the thickness of the reel sheet 4422) in the radial direction. Further, the pressing portion 4423c is arranged inside the overlapping portion 4422d in the radial direction, and presses the overlapping portion 4422d against the inner peripheral surface of the base member 4421. As a result, the pressing portion 4423c holds the overlapping portion 4422d in a posture along the circumferential direction of the reel seat 4422.

As shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, the right side mounting member 4424 is a substantially annular member attached to the right end of the base member 4421. The right side mounting member 4424 is formed so that the outer diameter of the left end portion thereof is smaller than the inner diameter of the right end portion of the base member 4421. The right side mounting member 4424 includes a flange portion 4424a and a claw portion 4424b.

The flange portion 4424a is formed in the middle left and right of the right side mounting member 4424. The flange portion 4424a is formed so that its outer diameter is larger than the inner diameter of the right end portion of the base member 4421 and smaller than the outer diameter of the right end portion of the base member 4421.

The claw portion 4424b is formed at the left end portion of the right side mounting member 4424. The tip of the claw portion 4424b projects radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the right side mounting member 4424. A plurality of claw portions 4424b are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction. More specifically, three claw portions 4424b are formed at intervals substantially the same as the circumferential spacing of the engaging holes 4421e of the base member 4421.

The left end of the right side mounting member 4424 configured in this way is inserted into the right end of the base member 4421, and the tip of the claw portion 4424b engages with the engagement hole 4421e of the base member 4421. As a result, the right side mounting member 4424 is configured to be rotatable integrally with the base member 4421. Further, as shown in FIG. 115, the right end mounting member 4424 is rotatably supported by the right side receiving member 4412 by fitting the right end portion thereof into the recess formed in the right side receiving member 4412.

The light emitting unit 4430 is for irradiating light in the forward direction. The light emitting unit 4430 is housed in the drum body 4420. The light emitting unit 4430 includes a substrate 4431 and an LED 4432.

The substrate 4431 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and the plate surface thereof is arranged in the front-rear direction. The substrate 4431 is arranged inside the reel sheet 4422. The substrate 4431 is arranged behind the shaft member 4414 and is fixed to the shaft member 4414 via the connecting member 4414a. As a result, the substrate 4431 is held by the mounting base 4410 with its plate surface facing in the front-rear direction even when the drum body 4420 rotates (so that it does not rotate integrally with the drum body 4420). ).

The LED 4432 is arranged at the lower left, the upper part (the upper part in the left and right central part), and the lower right of the substrate 4431. The LED 4432 is configured to be able to irradiate light in the forward direction by lighting.

The drive transmission mechanism 4440 is for transmitting a drive force to the drum body 4420. As shown in FIGS. 115 and 123, the drive transmission mechanism 4440 is provided on the left side receiving member 4413. The drive transmission mechanism 4440 includes a motor 4441, an upper gear 4442, and a lower gear 4443.

The motor 4441 is supported on the upper part of the left side receiving member 4413. The motor 4441 is arranged above the accommodating member 4411. The rotation shaft 4441a of the motor 4441 is formed so as to extend to the left from the main body of the motor 4441.

The upper gear 4442 is an external gear fixed to the rotating shaft 4441a of the motor 4441 via the bush 4442a. The upper gear 4442 is arranged above the left side mounting member 4423.

The lower gear 4443 is an external gear rotatably supported by the left receiving member 4413. The lower gear 4443 is arranged between the upper gear 4442 and the left side mounting member 4423, and meshes with the upper gear 4442 and the left side mounting member 4423, respectively.

Next, the operation mode of the effect device 4400 will be described. As an example of the operation mode of the effect device 4400, the player can see the symbol C from an invisible state (a state in which the symbol C is not facing forward) to a visible state (a state in which the symbol C is facing forward). , The operation mode in the case of changing the state will be described.

First, the effect device 4400 lights the LED 4432 and drives the motor 4441. As a result, the power of the motor 4441 is transmitted in the order of the rotating shaft 4441a, the upper gear 4442, the lower gear 4443, and the left side mounting member 4423, and the left side mounting member 4423 rotates in the circumferential direction about the axis thereof. As a result, the drum body 4420 rotates relative to the mounting base 4410 and the light emitting unit 4430.

After that, the effect device 4400 stops the motor 4441. As a result, the effect device 4400 causes the predetermined symbol C (for example, “111” shown in FIG. 118) printed on the reel sheet 4422 to be arranged at the front end portion. As a result, the effect device 4400 displays a predetermined symbol C to the player and transmits the light from the LED 4432 from the reel sheet 4422. In this way, the effect device 4400 gives the player the impression that the predetermined symbol C is emitting light.

As shown in FIG. 122, the drum main body 4420 according to the present embodiment has a first notch 4422a to a third notch 4422c and a first protrusion 4421a to a third protrusion 4421c, respectively. Engagement. According to this, it is possible to prevent the reel seat 4422 from rotating relative to the base member 4421. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the symbol C displayed to the player from being displaced due to the relative rotation of the reel sheet 4422.

Next, the assembling work of the drum main body 4420 will be described.

First, the reel seats 4422 shown in FIGS. 118 and 119 are rolled up and housed in the base member 4421. At this time, the reel sheet 4422 is rolled so that the ends of the reel sheet 4422 in the circumferential direction overlap each other in the radial direction. As a result, the overlapping portion 4422d is formed. Then, the reel sheet 4422 is inserted into the base member 4421 so that the first notch 4422a to the third notch 4422c and the first protrusion 4421a to the third protrusion 4421c are engaged with each other. (See FIG. 122). As a result, the reel seat 4422 is attached to the base member 4421. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first cutout portion 4422a to the third cutout portion 4422c are used as a guideline for the mounting position on the base member 4421.

Next, the left side mounting member 4423 is brought into contact with the base member 4421, and the base member 4421 and the left side mounting member 4423 are fixed by screws. At this time, the pressing portion 4423c is inserted into the opening portion 4421f of the base member 4421. At this time, the pressing portion 4423c enters the inside of the base member 4421 with the overlapping portion 4422d interposed between the pressing portion 4423c and the inner peripheral surface of the base member 4421 in the radial direction. When the base member 4421 and the left side mounting member 4423 are fixed in this way, the pressing portion 4423c presses the overlapping portion 4422d against the inner peripheral surface (diameter outer side) of the base member 4421 inside the base member 4421. It becomes.

After that, the left end portion of the right side mounting member 4424 is inserted into the right end portion of the base member 4421, and the claw portion 4424b of the right side mounting member 4424 is engaged with the engaging hole 4421e of the base member 4421. With the above, the assembling work of the drum main body 4420 is completed.

Since the drum body 4420 according to the present embodiment has a configuration in which the reel sheet 4422 is housed in the base member 4421, it is possible to restrict the reel sheet 4422 from opening due to its elasticity by the inner peripheral surface of the base member 4421. can. According to this, the reel sheet 4422 can be held in a rolled state without sticking the reel sheet 4422 to the base member 4421 with double-sided tape. As a result, double-sided tape is not required when the reel sheet 4422 is attached to the base member 4421, and the reel sheet 4422 can be smoothly accommodated in the base member 4421. Further, the reel sheet 4422 can be easily taken out from the base member 4421 simply by pulling it out from the base member 4421. According to this, the detachability between the base member 4421 and the reel sheet 4422 can be improved, and the base member 4421 and the reel sheet 4422 can be easily reused. In addition, the number of parts can be reduced to reduce the manufacturing cost.

Further, in the reel sheet 4422 according to the present embodiment, the deformation of the overlapping portion 4422d is suppressed by the pressing portion 4423c. Specifically, when the left side mounting member 4423 that does not have the holding portion 4423c shown in FIG. 125 (a) is assembled to the base member 4421, as shown in FIG. 125 (b), the reel sheet 4422 is a superposed portion. Since the 4422d is not fixed, the end portion in the circumferential direction (more specifically, the end portion on the inner side in the radial direction) may be deformed so as to warp inward in the radial direction. As a result, a gap S may be formed. In this case, since the light of the LED 4432 leaks from the gap S, the gap S may be conspicuous and the aesthetic appearance may be impaired.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 122 and 124, in the present embodiment, the overlapping portion 4422d is pressed against the inner peripheral surface of the base member 4421 by the pressing portion 4423c. According to this, the overlapping portion 4422d can be held in a predetermined posture (deformation is suppressed). As a result, it is possible to prevent light from leaking from the end portion of the reel sheet 4422 in the circumferential direction, and thus it is possible to prevent the appearance from being spoiled.

Further, the overlapping portion 4422d of the reel sheet 4422 according to the present embodiment is formed in a portion where the symbol C is not printed. According to this, since the overlapping portion 4422d can be made inconspicuous, the aesthetic appearance can be improved.

Further, the reel seat 4422 according to the present embodiment can determine (position) the position in the circumferential direction with respect to the base member 4421 with reference to the plurality of cutout portions 4422a to 4422c. According to this, the reel seat 4422 can be positioned with higher accuracy than the case where the reel seat 4422 is positioned with only one notch.

Here, if a plurality of notches 4422a to 4422c (and a plurality of protrusions 4421a to 4421c) are arranged at the same interval in the circumferential direction, the symbol C identifies the base member 4421 at the time of assembly. It may shift in the circumferential direction (rotational direction) with respect to the position of. Specifically, when the first notch 4422a is engaged with the second protrusion 4421b, the second notch 4422b is engaged with the third protrusion 4421c and the third notch 4422c is engaged with the third protrusion 4422c. It engages with the protrusion 4421a of 1. In this case, even if all the cutouts 4422a to 4422c are engaged with all the protrusions 4421a to 4421c, the symbol C (reel sheet 4422) will be displaced by 120 ° from the specific position.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121, the distance L1c from the first notch 4422a to the second notch 4422b is the distance L1c from the second notch 4422b to the third notch 4422c. The distance to L2c is different from that of L2c. In this case, unless the notch corresponding to the protrusion (for example, the first notch 4422a corresponding to the first protrusion 4421a) is engaged, all the notches 4422a to 4422c are all the protrusions 4421a to. Cannot engage with 4421c. For example, when the second notch 4422b is to be engaged with the first protrusion 4421a, the positions of the other notches 4422a and 4422c in the circumferential direction are displaced from the other protrusions 4421b and 4421c and are engaged with each other. It becomes impossible to meet.

As described above, even if the reel sheet 4422 according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of notch portions 4422a to 4422c, it has a pattern in which all the notch portions 4422a to 4422c can be engaged with all the protrusions 4421a to 4421c. Can be one. As a result, the reel sheet 4422 can be placed at a specific position of the base member 4421 by simply engaging the first notch 4422a to the third notch 4422c with the first protrusion 4421a to the third protrusion 4421c. Can be placed with high accuracy. According to this, after the reel sheet 4422 is attached to the base member 4421, it is not necessary to realign the attachment position of the reel sheet 4422 with respect to the base member 4421.

The pressing portion 4423c according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the pressing member according to the present invention.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, the type of the gaming machine is a pachinko machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a slot machine or the like may be used.

Further, the reel sheet 4422 is not limited to the reel sheet 4422, although the ends thereof in the circumferential direction are overlapped with each other in the radial direction. The reel sheet 4422 is not limited to only the end portion, and at least a part of the reel sheet 4422 may overlap in the radial direction. Further, in the present embodiment, the entire end portion of the reel sheet 4422 (from the left end to the right end of the circumferential end portion) is overlapped, but only a part of the end portions may be overlapped. The state in which the ends of the reel seats 4422 overlap as described above is also included in the "partially overlapping ends of the reel seats".

Further, although the holding portion 4423c is formed on the left side mounting member 4423, the member on which the holding portion 4423c is formed is not limited to the left side mounting member 4423. The pressing portion 4423c may be formed on, for example, the base member 4421 or the right side mounting member 4424. Further, the pressing portion 4423c may be composed of a predetermined member (a member different from the left side mounting member 4423) fixed to the opening 4421f of the base member 4421.

Further, the pressing portion 4423c may be configured to press the left end portion and the right end portion of the overlapping portion 4422d, respectively. In such a case, the holding portion 4423c is formed on, for example, the left side mounting member 4423 and the right side mounting member 4424. With this configuration, the overlapping portion 4422d can be pressed at the left end portion and the right end portion of the overlapping portion 4422d. As a result, deformation of the overlapping portion 4422d can be reliably prevented. The right side mounting member 4424 may hold the overlapping portion 4422d by the claw portion 4424b. In this case, the claw portion 4424b functions as a pressing member.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of protrusions and notches is assumed to be three, but the number of protrusions and notches is not limited to this, and is, for example, one or four or more. May be good. However, from the viewpoint of improving the positioning accuracy, the number of protrusions and notches is preferably three or more.

Further, the three protrusions 4421a to 4421c and the three notches 4422a to 4422c may be arranged at the same interval in the rotation direction of the drum main body 4420.

Further, the three notches 4422a to 4422c are formed at the left end of the reel seat 4422 (arranged so as to be aligned in the left-right direction), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the left and right portions are not limited to each. It may be offset in the direction.

Further, the reel seat 4422 may be configured to engage with the base member 4421 and the right side mounting member 4424, respectively. In such a case, the reel sheet 4422 is formed with, for example, three notches at the left end and the right end, respectively. Further, the right side mounting member 4424 includes three protrusions that can be engaged with the notch on the right side of the reel seat 4422. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the reel seat 4422 from rotating relative to the base member 4421 at the left end portion and the right end portion of the reel seat 4422. This makes it possible to reliably prevent the reel seat 4422 from rotating relative to the base member 4421.

Further, in the present embodiment, the reel sheet 4422 is provided with a plurality of notches 4422a to 4422c, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the reel sheet 4422 may be provided with a plurality of protrusions. good. In this case, the base member 4421 includes notches that can engage with the plurality of protrusions.

Further, the reel sheet 4422 uses three notches 4422a to 4422c as a guideline for the mounting position, but the guideline for the mounting position is not limited to the notch portion, and a plurality of printed parts printed on the outer peripheral surface of the reel sheet 4422. It may be a mark of.

Further, the base member 4421 is assumed to be entirely formed of a transparent resin material, but the base member 4421 is not limited to this. The base member 4421 may be such that the symbol C can be visually recognized from the outside. That is, at least a part of the outer peripheral surface of the base member 4421 may be transparent. Specifically, the base member 4421 may have, for example, half of the outer peripheral surface formed of a transparent resin material.

Next, the overall configuration of the game ball distribution device 5400 shown in FIGS. 126 to 128 will be described.

The game ball distribution device 5400 is for distributing the game ball A (see FIG. 131) to a plurality of passages. The game ball distribution device 5400 includes a base member 5410, a rotary distribution mechanism 5420, a plate-shaped member 5430, a crune 5440, a guide member 5450, a holding member 5460, and a sensor group 5470.

The base member 5410 is a member for guiding the game ball A inside the game ball distribution device 5400. The base member 5410 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open rear side surface. The right portion of the base member 5410 projects upward from the other portions. The base member 5410 includes an inflow port 5411, an introduction path 5412, a left guide path 5413, a right guide path 5414, an installation space 5415, and an opening 5416.

The inflow port 5411 is a hole (entrance) for entering the game ball A. The inflow port 5411 is formed at the upper right end portion (protruding portion) of the base member 5410. The inflow port 5411 is formed in a substantially square shape in a plan view. The inflow port 5411 is formed so as to have a size that allows the game ball A to enter the ball. The inflow port 5411 is arranged below the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The inflow port 5411 is configured so that the game ball A can enter from above.

As shown in FIGS. 128 and 129, the introduction path 5412 is a passage for guiding the game ball A that has entered the inflow port 5411 downward. The introduction path 5412 is formed so as to extend downward from the inflow port 5411.

The left guide path 5413 is a passage for guiding the game ball A guided to the lower end of the introduction path 5412 to the lower left. The left guide path 5413 is formed so as to extend downward to the left from the lower end of the introduction path 5412.

The right guide path 5414 is a passage for guiding the game ball A guided to the lower end of the introduction path 5412 to the lower right. The right guide path 5414 is formed so as to extend downward to the right from the lower end portion of the introduction path 5412, and the extended end portion extends downward. The right guide portion is formed from the upper and lower middle portion to the lower end portion of the base member 5410. The right guide path 5414 includes a guide portion 5414a.

The guide portion 5414a is for guiding the game ball A guided to the lower end portion of the right side guide path 5414 in the rear direction. The guide portion 5414a is formed at the lower end of the right guide path 5414 and is formed in a substantially arc shape in a side view.

The installation space 5415 is an internal space of the base member 5410 on which the crune 5440 and the like, which will be described later, are provided. The installation space 5415 is formed from the left and right halfway portion (left side of the left guide path 5413) to the left end portion of the base member 5410. The right end of the installation space 5415 communicates with the left guideway 5413.

As shown in FIGS. 126 and 129, the opening 5416 is a hole (inspection entrance) for inserting the game ball A at the time of inspection described later. The opening 5416 is formed at the upper end of the front side surface of the base member 5410 and penetrates the base member 5410 in the front-rear direction. The opening 5416 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view. The opening 5416 is formed from the left and right halfway portion of the base member 5410 (to the left of the left guide path 5413) to the vicinity of the left end portion. The opening 5416 communicates with the upper end of the installation space 5415. The opening 5416 is formed so that its vertical width is wide enough to allow the game ball A to enter, and the opening 5416 is configured to allow the game ball A to enter from the front in the entire area thereof. The opening 5416 is blocked by the glass door 13 when the player plays a game, and the game ball A cannot enter the ball A.

As shown in FIGS. 128 and 129, the rotary distribution mechanism 5420 distributes the game ball A guided to the lower end of the introduction path 5412 to the left guide path 5413 or the right guide path 5414. The rotary distribution mechanism 5420 is provided at the lower end of the introduction path 5412. The rotary distribution mechanism 5420 includes a rotating body 5421, a pin 5422, a sheet metal 5423, and a magnet 5424.

The rotating body 5421 is formed in a substantially inverted T-shape in rear view having a portion extending in the left-right direction and a portion extending in the upward direction. As shown in FIG. 129, the rotating body 5421 includes a base portion 5421a, a protruding portion 5421b, a left side receiving portion 5421c, and a right side receiving portion 5421d.

The base portion 5421a is a portion extending in the left-right direction of the rotating body 5421. The base portion 5421a is formed so that its lateral width is substantially the same as the lateral width of the introduction path 5412.

The protruding portion 5421b is a portion extending upward of the rotating body 5421. The protruding portion 5421b is formed so as to extend from the left and right central portions of the base portion 5421a.

The left side receiving portion 5421c is a portion that receives the game ball A in the left portion of the rotating body 5421. The left side receiving portion 5421c is formed by a left portion on the upper side surface of the base portion 5421a and a left side surface of the protruding portion 5421b.

The right receiving portion 5421d is a portion that receives the game ball A in the right portion of the rotating body 5421. The right receiving portion 5421d is formed by a right portion on the upper side surface of the base portion 5421a and a right surface of the protruding portion 5421b.

The pin 5422 is arranged with its axial direction oriented in the front-rear direction. The pin 5422 is inserted through the base portion 5421a of the rotating body 5421. The front end of the pin 5422 is fixed to the base member 5410, and the rear end of the pin 5422 is fixed to the plate-shaped member 5430 (see FIG. 128), which will be described later. As a result, the pin 5422 rotatably supports the rotating body 5421 with respect to the base member 5410.

The sheet metal 5423 is a plate-shaped member fixed to the rear side surface of the base portion 5421a of the rotating body 5421. The sheet metal 5423 is formed so that the left end portion and the right end portion thereof are larger than the other portions. The sheet metal 5423 is composed of a magnetic material such as iron that is attracted by a magnetic force.

The magnet 5424 shown in FIG. 128 is formed in a substantially disk shape. The magnet 5424 is fixed to a pressing member 5460, which will be described later, and is arranged behind the sheet metal 5423. The magnet 5424 holds the rotating body 5421 in a state where the right receiving portion 5421d as shown in FIG. 129 faces upward and the left receiving portion 5421c faces left by attracting the left end portion of the sheet metal 5423.

A notch (not shown) extending in the left-right direction is formed on the lower side surface of the rotating body 5421 of the rotary distribution mechanism 5420. A protrusion (not shown) formed on the base member 5410 is arranged inside the notch. The rotating body 5421 is restricted from rotating beyond a predetermined angle range by appropriately contacting the notch with the protrusion. The predetermined angle range is a range from a state in which the right receiving portion 5421d faces upward to a state in which the left receiving portion 5421c faces upward (the state shown in FIG. 133). The rotating body 5421 can rotate in the counterclockwise direction in the rear view from the state in which the right receiving portion 5421d faces upward to the state in which the left receiving portion 5421c faces upward. Further, the rotating body 5421 can rotate in the clockwise direction in the rear view from the state in which the left receiving portion 5421c faces upward to the state in which the right receiving portion 5421d faces upward.

The rotary distribution mechanism 5420 configured in this way causes the game ball A guided to the lower end of the introduction path 5412 to the left guide path 5413 or the right guide path 5414 by rotating the rotating body 5421 in an appropriate direction. Sort. The distribution operation of the game ball A by the rotary distribution mechanism 5420 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIGS. 126 to 128, the plate-shaped member 5430 is for closing the right rear portion of the base member 5410. The plate-shaped member 5430 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The plate-shaped member 5430 is formed so that its vertical width and horizontal width are wider than the vertical width and horizontal width of the base member 5410. The plate-shaped member 5430 includes a left side through hole 5431 and a right side through hole 5432.

The left through hole 5431 is a hole that penetrates the plate surface in the front-rear direction at the left portion of the plate-shaped member 5430. The left through hole 5431 is formed so as to have substantially the same shape as the installation space 5415 when viewed from the front.

The right through hole 5432 is a hole that penetrates the plate surface in the front-rear direction in the lower right portion of the plate-shaped member 5430. The right through hole 5432 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in front view. The right through hole 5432 is formed so as to have a size that allows the game ball A to pass through.

The plate-shaped member 5430 is arranged behind the base member 5410 and is fixed to the base member 5410 by screws. As a result, the left through hole 5431 communicates with the installation space 5415. The right through hole 5432 communicates with the lower end of the right guide path 5414.

As shown in FIGS. 127 to 129, the crune 5440 is a dish-shaped member for distributing the game ball A. The crune 5440 is formed in a substantially circular shape in a plan view, and the game ball A can roll on the upper side surface thereof. Further, the upper side surface of the Kroon 5440 is formed in a shape that gradually inclines downward toward the central portion thereof. That is, the upper side surface of the Kroon 5440 is formed in a shape that can guide the game ball A to the central portion. The crune 5440 includes a connecting portion 5441, a first starting port 5442, an out opening 5443.5444 and a protruding portion 5445.

The connecting portion 5441 is a portion formed so as to extend to the right from the front end portion of the upper side surface (part in a substantially circular shape in a plan view) of the Kroon 5440. The connecting portion 5441 is configured so that the game ball A can enter from the right end portion thereof. Further, the connecting portion 5441 is configured to be able to guide the game ball A to the left.

The first starting port 5442 is a substantially circular hole in a plan view formed in the front portion of the crune 5440. The first starting port 5442 penetrates the crune 5440 in the vertical direction. The first starting port 5442 has an inner diameter that allows the game ball A to enter the ball.

The out port 5443 is a substantially circular hole in a plan view formed at the left rear portion of the crune 5440 (left rear portion of the first starting port 5442). The out port 5444 is a substantially circular hole in a plan view formed at the right rear portion of the crune 5440 (to the right of the out port 5443). The out ports 5443 and 5444 are formed so as to have substantially the same shape as the first starting port 5442.

The protrusion 5445 is a substantially triangular pyramid-shaped portion formed in the central portion of the crune 5440. The protrusion 5445 is formed so as to project upward from the upper side surface of the crune 5440. The protrusion 5445 appropriately flips the game ball A guided by the crune 5440 to allow the game ball A to enter the first start port 5442 or the out port 5443 / 5444. As a result, the game ball A guided by the crune 5440 can be distributed to the first starting port 5442 or the out port 5443 / 5444.

The crune 5440 configured in this way is fixed to the plate-shaped member 5430 by screws. The front end of the Kroon 5440 projects forward from the left through hole 5431 and is located above the installation space 5415. The right end of the connecting portion 5441 is connected to the left lower end of the left guideway 5413, and the game ball A guided to the left lower end of the left guideway 5413 can be guided to the left. Further, the crune 5440 is arranged below the rear of the opening 5416. As a result, the first start port 5442 and the out ports 5443 and 5444 are configured so that the game ball A can be directly entered from the opening 5416 in the inspection described later (see FIG. 134).

As shown in FIGS. 128 and 129, the guide member 5450 is a member for guiding the game ball A that has entered the first start port 5442 or the out ports 5443 and 5444 to the pressing member 5460, which will be described later. The guide member 5450 is formed so that the upper side surface of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped member is appropriately recessed downward. The guide member 5450 is formed so that its lateral width is substantially the same as the lateral width of the crune 5440. The guide member 5450 includes a protrusion 5451, a mounting portion 5452, a front guide path 5453, and a rear guide path 5454.

The protruding portion 5451 is a portion that protrudes rearward from the left rear end portion on the upper side surface of the guide member 5450. The protruding portion 5451 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape.

The mounting portion 5452 is a recess formed in the front end portion of the upper side surface of the guide member 5450. The mounting portion 5452 has a side wall and a bottom surface formed in a substantially U shape in a plan view. A first start port switch 5472, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment portion 5452.

The front guide path 5453 is a recess formed on the upper side surface of the guide member 5450, and is a passage for guiding the game ball A that has entered the first starting port 5442 to the holding member 5460. The front guide path 5453 is formed in a substantially L-shape in a plan view so as to extend to the right and the extended end portion to extend in the rear direction. The front portion of the front guideway 5453 is arranged below the mounting portion 5452.

The rear guide path 5454 is a recess formed in the rear portion of the upper side surface of the guide member 5450, and is a passage for guiding the game ball A that has entered the out ports 5443 and 5444 to the holding member 5460. The rear guide path 5454 is formed in a substantially L-shape in a plan view so as to extend to the right and the extended end portion to extend in the rear direction. The rear guide path 5454 is formed between the protruding portion 5451 and the mounting portion 5452. The rear guideway 5454 is formed so as not to communicate with the front guideway 5453.

The guide member 5450 thus configured is fixed to the lower part of the crune 5440 by a screw. The guide member 5450 is fixed to the plate-shaped member 5430 via the crune 5440 and is arranged in the lower part of the installation space 5415. The mounting portion 5452 and the front guideway 5453 are arranged below the first start port 5442 of the crune 5440 and are connected to the left guideway 5413 of the base member 5410 via the first start port 5442. Further, the left end portion and the right front end portion of the rear side guideway 5454 are arranged below the out ports 5443 and 5444, and are connected to the left side guideway 5413 via the out ports 5443 and 5444.

As shown in FIGS. 127 and 130, the pressing member 5460 is a member for pressing the plate-shaped member 5430 from the rear. The pressing member 5460 is formed in a shape capable of closing the left through hole 5431 and the right through hole 5432 of the plate-shaped member 5430 from the rear direction. The pressing member 5460 is formed so that its front side surface is appropriately recessed in the rear direction. The pressing member 5460 includes a mounting portion 5461, a right discharge path 5462, a front discharge path 5436, and a rear discharge path 5464.

The mounting portion 5461 is a recess formed in the upper left portion on the front side surface of the pressing member 5460. The mounting portion 5461 is formed in a substantially arc shape in a plan view so as to follow the shape of the rear portion of the crune 5440. The mounting portion 5461 is formed from the left end portion of the pressing member 5460 to the left and right halfway portions. The mounting portion 5461 is recessed downward from the vicinity of the left end portion on the lower side surface to the middle left and right portions with respect to other portions.

The right discharge passage 5462 is a passage for discharging the game ball A that has passed through the right through hole 5432 of the plate-shaped member 5430 to the outside of the game ball distribution device 5400. The right discharge passage 5462 is formed so as to extend backward and the lower side surface of the extended end opens to the outside. The right discharge path 5462 is formed at the right end of the front side surface of the pressing member 5460.

The front discharge passage 5436 is a recess formed in the lower portion on the front side surface of the pressing member 5460, and the game ball A guided to the rear end of the front guide passage 5453 of the guide member 5450 is provided by the game ball distribution device 5400. It is a passage for discharging to the outside. The front discharge path 5436 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view. The front discharge passage 5436 is formed below the mounting portion 5461 and to the left of the right discharge passage 5462. The front discharge path 5436 is formed so as to extend downward from below the mounting portion 5461 to the lower end portion of the pressing member 5460.

The rear discharge passage 5464 is a recess formed in the lower left portion on the front side surface of the pressing member 5460, and the game ball A guided to the rear end of the rear guide passage 5454 of the guide member 5450 is distributed to the game ball. It is a passage for discharging to the outside of the device 5400. The rear discharge passage 5464 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view. The rear discharge passage 5464 is arranged below the mounting portion 5461 and to the left of the front discharge passage 5436. The rear discharge passage 5464 is formed so as to extend downward from below the mounting portion 5461 to the lower end portion of the pressing member 5460.

The pressing member 5460 configured in this way is fixed to the rear side surface of the plate-shaped member 5430 with screws, and closes the left side through hole 5431 and the right side through hole 5432 (front side guide path 5453 and rear side guide path 5454) from the rear direction. do. The rear portion of the Kroon 5440 is mounted on the mounting portion 5461. Further, the protruding portion 5451 of the guide member 5450 is mounted on the portion recessed downward of the mounting portion 5461. The front end of the right discharge passage 5462 is connected to the right through hole 5432. The upper end of the front discharge path 5436 is connected to the rear end of the front guide path 5453. The upper end of the rear discharge path 5464 is connected to the rear end of the rear guide path 5454.

The sensor group 5470 is for detecting that the game ball A has entered the right guide path 5414, the front guide path 5453, and the rear guide path 5454. The sensor group 5470 includes an out port switch 5471, a first start port switch 5472, and an out port switch 5473.

The out port switch 5471 is a sensor for detecting that the game ball A has entered the right guide path 5414. The out port switch 5471 is formed in a flat plate shape with its plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The out port switch 5471 is provided with a through hole 5471a.

The through hole 5471a is a hole having a substantially circular shape in the front view that penetrates the out port switch 5471 in the front-rear direction. The through hole 5471a has an inner diameter that allows the game ball A to pass through. The through hole 5471a is formed in the lower part of the out port switch 5471.

The out port switch 5471 configured in this way is attached to the right front end portion of the pressing member 5460. As a result, the through hole 5471a is arranged behind the right through hole 5432 of the plate-shaped member 5430. The out port switch 5471 is configured to form, for example, a magnetic field in the through hole 5471a and to detect an eddy current generated when the game ball A passes through the magnetic field (through hole 5471a). The out port switch 5471 detects that the game ball A has entered the right guide path 5414 based on the detection result of the eddy current.

The first start port switch 5472 is a sensor for detecting that the game ball A has entered the front guide path 5453. The first start port switch 5472 is configured in the same manner as the out port switch 5471 except that the plate surface is arranged in the vertical direction and the first start port switch 5472 is attached to the attachment portion 5452 of the guide member 5450. The through hole 5472a is arranged between the first starting port 5442 and the front guide path 5453.

The out port switch 5473 is a sensor for detecting that the game ball A has entered the rear guide path 5454. The out port switch 5473 is configured in the same manner as the first start port switch 5472 except that it is attached below the mounting portion 5461 of the holding member 5460. The through hole 5473a is arranged in the lower part of the rear discharge passage 5464.

As shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, the game ball distribution device 5400 configured in this way provides the first passage 5501 and the second passage 5502 as passages for distributing the game balls A flowing in from the inflow port 5411. Equipped.

The first start port and the second start port may be integrally provided in the game ball distribution device 5400. In that case, for example, the above-mentioned out port switch 5471 is configured as the first starting port switch, and the first starting port switch 5472 is configured as the second starting port switch. Further, a sensor may be provided at the out port and used as a V region at a specific timing.

The first passage 5501 is a passage for guiding the game ball A distributed to the left guide path 5413 by the rotary distribution mechanism 5420. The first passage 5501 includes a left guide path 5413 of the base member 5410, a connection portion 5441 of the crune 5440, a first start port 5442 and an out port 5443.5444, and an anterior guide path 5453 and a rear guide path 5454 of the guide member 5450. In addition, it is composed of a front discharge passage 5436 and a rear discharge passage 5464 of the holding member 5460. The first passage 5501 branches into two passages at Kroon 5440. The first passage 5501 includes a third passage 5503 and a fourth passage 5504 as the branched passage.

The third passage 5503 is a passage for guiding the game ball A that has entered the first starting port 5442 of the Kroon 5440. The third passage 5503 is composed of a first starting port 5442 of the crune 5440, a front guide passage 5453 of the guide member 5450, and a front discharge passage 5436 of the holding member 5460.

The fourth passage 5504 is a passage for guiding the game ball A that has entered the out ports 5443 and 5444 of the Kroon 5440. The fourth passage 5504 is composed of the out ports 5443 and 5444 of the crune 5440, the rear guide passage 5454 of the guide member 5450, and the rear discharge passage 5464 of the holding member 5460.

The second passage 5502 is a passage for guiding the game ball A distributed to the right guide path 5414 by the rotary distribution mechanism 5420. The second passage 5502 is composed of a right guide path 5414 of the base member 5410, a right through hole 5432 (see FIG. 128) of the plate-shaped member 5430, and a right discharge path 5462 of the holding member 5460.

Next, the operation mode of the game ball distribution device 5400 will be described. In the following, as shown in FIG. 131, it is assumed that the game ball A is entered from the inflow port 5411 with the right side receiving portion 5421d of the rotating body 5421 facing upward.

First, the game ball A that has entered the inflow port 5411 is guided downward by the introduction path 5412 and collides with the right receiving portion 5421d of the rotating body 5421 of the rotary distribution mechanism 5420. As a result, the rotating body 5421 and the sheet metal 5423 rotate in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear. By the rotation, the rotating body 5421 guides the game ball A in the lower right direction and distributes the game ball A to the second passage 5502 (right guide path 5414). When the left side receiving portion 5421c of the sheet metal 5423 rotates until it faces upward, the right end portion thereof is attracted to the magnet 5424 (see FIG. 128). As a result, the rotating body 5421 is held by the magnet 5424 with the left side receiving portion 5421c facing upward (see FIG. 133).

The game ball A (hereinafter referred to as “game ball A2”) distributed to the second passage 5502 is guided downward on the right guide path 5414 and then guided backward by the guide portion 5414a. The game ball A2 passes backward through the right through hole 5432 (see FIG. 127) of the plate-shaped member 5430. After that, as shown in FIG. 132, the game ball A2 is guided to the front end portion of the right discharge path 5462 of the pressing member 5460. At this time, the game ball A2 passes through the through hole 5471a of the out port switch 5471 in the rear direction. As a result, the out port switch 5471 detects that the game ball A2 has been distributed to the second passage 5502 (right side guide path 5414). The game ball A2 that has passed through the through hole 5471a is guided backward through the right discharge path 5462 and is discharged to the outside of the game ball distribution device 5400.

As described above, in the second passage 5502, the right guide path 5414, the right through hole 5432, and the right discharge path 5462 are arranged in order from the upstream side. Further, the second passage 5502 is arranged on the downstream side of the rotary distribution mechanism 5420, and an out port switch 5471 is provided in the middle of the second passage 5502.

Further, as shown in FIG. 133, when the game ball A is inserted into the inflow port 5411 of the base member 5410 in a state where the left side receiving portion 5421c is facing upward, the game ball A is on the left side of the rotating body 5421. It collides with the receiving portion 5421c. As a result, the rotating body 5421 and the sheet metal 5423 rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear. By the rotation, the rotating body 5421 guides the game ball A in the lower left direction and distributes the game ball A to the first passage 5501 (left guide path 5413). The left end of the sheet metal 5423 is attracted to the magnet 5424 (see FIG. 128) when the right receiving portion 5421d rotates until it faces upward. As a result, the rotating body 5421 is held by the magnet 5424 with the right side receiving portion 5421d facing upward (see FIG. 131).

The game ball A distributed to the first passage 5501 is guided in the lower left direction on the left guide path 5413, and then is guided to the vicinity of the first starting port 5442 through the connecting portion 5441 of the crune 5440. The game ball A is guided on the upper side surface of the croon 5440 in the clockwise direction in a plan view, and is gradually guided to the central portion of the croon 5440. At this time, the protruding portion 5445 of the crune 5440 plays the game ball A as appropriate. As a result, the Kroon 5440 causes the game ball A to enter either the first start port 5442 or the out port 5443.5444. In this way, the Kroon 5440 distributes the game ball A to the third passage 5503 or the fourth passage 5504.

As described above, in the first passage 5501, in order from the upstream side, the left guide path 5413, the connecting portion 5441, the upper side surface of the crune 5440 (a substantially circular portion in a plan view), the third passage 5503, and the fourth passage 5503. The passage 5504 is arranged. The opening 5416 is formed to open to the upper side surfaces of the connecting portion 5441 and the crune 5440. That is, the opening 5416 is provided at the same position as the upper side surface of the connecting portion 5441 and the crune 5440 (downstream from the left guide passage 5413 and upstream from the third passage 5503 and the fourth passage 5504). Further, the first passage 5501 is arranged on the downstream side of the rotary distribution mechanism 5420.

As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the game ball A (hereinafter referred to as “game ball A3”) distributed to the third passage 5503 (entered into the first start port 5442) is the first start. It passes downward through the through hole 5472a of the mouth switch 5472. As a result, the first start port switch 5472 detects that the game ball A3 has been distributed to the third passage 5503 (front guide path 5453). The game ball A3 that has passed through the through hole 5472a is guided to the left front end of the front guide path 5453. Then, the game ball A3 is guided in the rear direction after being guided to the right side on the front side guide path 5453, and is guided to the upper end portion of the front side discharge path 5436. The game ball A3 is guided downward along the front discharge path 5436 and is discharged to the outside of the game ball distribution device 5400.

As described above, in the third passage 5503, the first starting port 5442, the front guide passage 5453, and the front discharge passage 5436 are arranged in order from the upstream side. Further, the third passage 5503 is provided with a first start port switch 5472 in the middle of the passage 5503.

On the other hand, the game ball A (hereinafter referred to as "game ball A4") distributed to the fourth passage 5504 (entered into the out ports 5443 and 5444) is guided to the left front end of the rear guideway 5454. Will be done. Then, the game ball A4 is guided in the rear direction after being guided to the right side on the rear side guide path 5454, and is guided to the upper end portion of the rear side discharge path 5464. The game ball A4 is guided downward along the rear discharge path 5464 and is discharged to the outside of the game ball distribution device 5400. At this time, the game ball A4 passes downward through the through hole 5473a of the out port switch 5473. As a result, the out port switch 5473 detects that the game ball A4 has been distributed to the fourth passage 5504 (rear side guide path 5454).

As described above, in the fourth passage 5504, the out ports 5443 and 5444, the rear guide passage 5454, and the rear discharge passage 5464 are arranged in order from the upstream side. Further, the fourth passage 5504 is provided with an out port switch 5473 in the middle of the passage 5504.

As described above, the rotary distribution mechanism 5420 distributes the game ball A to the first passage 5501 or the second passage 5502 in order (with a probability of 1/2). In addition, the Kroon 5440 distributes the game ball A distributed to the first passage 5501 to the third passage 5503 with a one-third probability and to the fourth passage 5504 with a two-thirds probability. .. That is, the rotary distribution mechanism 5420 and the crune 5440 distribute the game ball A that has entered the inflow port 5411 to the third passage 5503 with a probability of 1/6, and the fourth with a probability of 2/6. Allocate to passage 5504.

Here, the game ball distribution device 5400 is inspected at the time of manufacturing or at the time of maintenance in the hall. In the inspection, the glass door 13 is opened and the game ball A is directly inserted into the game ball distribution device 5400, and the flow of the game ball A and the operation of the out port switch 5471 and the like are confirmed.

As shown in FIG. 131, when inspecting the second passage 5502, the game ball A enters from the inflow port 5411 of the base member 5410. At this time, the game ball A is distributed to the second passage 5502 by the rotary distribution mechanism 5420 with a probability of 1/2. In the inspection, the flow of the game ball A2 distributed to the second passage 5502 is confirmed. Further, the operation of the out-port switch 5471 is confirmed by confirming whether or not the out-port switch 5471 has detected that the game ball A2 has passed through the through hole 5471a (see FIG. 132).

Further, as shown in FIG. 134, when inspecting the first passage 5501, the game balls A3 and A4 are inserted into the crune 5440 from the opening 5416 of the base member 5410. As described above, in the inspection, the opening 5416 is inspected from the outside of the game ball distribution device 5400 to the distribution destination of the rotary distribution mechanism 5420 (first passage 5501, in the present embodiment, the croon 5440) to the game balls A3 and A4. Can be entered. By inspecting the third passage 5503 and the fourth passage 5504 with such game balls A3 and A4, the first passage 5501 is inspected.

As shown in FIGS. 132 and 134, when inspecting the third passage 5503, the game ball A3 is directly inserted into the first starting port 5442 from the opening 5416. As a result, the game ball A3 is directly entered into the third passage 5503 without being distributed by the crune 5440. In the inspection, the flow of the game ball A3 entered into the third passage 5503 is confirmed. Further, the operation of the first start port switch 5472 is confirmed by confirming whether or not the first start port switch 5472 has detected that the game ball A3 has passed through the through hole 5472a (see FIG. 128). .. As described above, since the first start port switch 5472 can detect the game ball A3 entered from the opening 5416 in the inspection, it can be said that the first start port switch 5472 is on the downstream side of the opening 5416.

When inspecting the fourth passage 5504, the game ball A4 is directly inserted into the out openings 5443 and 5444 through the opening 5416. As a result, the game ball A4 is directly entered into the fourth passage 5504 without being distributed by the crune 5440. In the inspection, the flow of the game ball A4 that has entered the fourth passage 5504 is confirmed. Further, the operation of the out-port switch 5473 is confirmed by confirming whether or not the out-port switch 5473 has detected that the game ball A4 has passed through the through hole 5473a. As described above, the out port switch 5473 can be said to be on the downstream side of the opening 5416 because the game ball A4 entered from the opening 5416 can be detected in the inspection.

According to the game ball distribution device 5400 according to the present embodiment, the game balls A3 and A4 can be inserted into the crune 5440 from the opening 5416. As a result, the game balls A3 and A4 can be directly entered into the first passage 5501 without being sorted by the rotary distribution mechanism 5420. Therefore, when inspecting the first passage 5501, all the game balls A3 and A4 can enter the first passage 5501 (the second passage 5502 with a half probability by the rotary distribution mechanism 5420). Can't be sorted into). This makes it possible to efficiently inspect the first passage 5501.

Further, the game ball distribution device 5400 can directly enter the game ball A3 from the opening 5416 into the first starting port 5442 of the crune 5440. According to this, the game ball A3 can be directly entered into the third passage 5503 without being sorted by the crune 5440. This allows all game balls A3 to enter the third passage 5503 when inspecting the third passage 5503 (the Kroon 5440 has a two-thirds chance that it will not be distributed to the fourth passage 5504). Therefore, the inspection of the third passage 5503 can be performed efficiently.

Here, if the game ball A is entered from the inflow port 5411 and an attempt is made to inspect the third passage 5503, the game ball A is distributed by the rotary distribution mechanism 5420 and the crune 5440, and is one-sixth. Only with a probability, the game ball A can enter the third passage 5503. On the other hand, the game ball distribution device 5400 according to the present embodiment can enter the game ball A3 into the third passage 5503 with a 100% probability. According to this, the inspection of the third passage 5503, which has the lowest probability of being sorted, can be efficiently performed.

Further, the game ball distribution device 5400 can directly insert the game ball A4 from the opening 5416 into the out ports 5443 and 5444. According to this, the game ball A4 can be directly entered into the fourth passage 5504 without being sorted by the crune 5440. This allows all game balls A4 to enter the fourth passage 5504 when inspecting the fourth passage 5504 (the Kroon 5440 does not have a one-third chance of being distributed to the third passage 5503). Therefore, the inspection of the fourth passage 5504 can be performed efficiently.

As described above, the game ball distribution device 5400 according to the present embodiment passes through the first passage 5501 (third passage 5503 and fourth passage 5504) without being distributed to the rotary distribution mechanism 5420 and the crune 5440. Can be inspected. According to this, it is possible to efficiently inspect the game ball distribution device 5400. Regarding the inspection of the second passage 5502, the game ball A is distributed by the rotary distribution mechanism 5420 for the convenience of allowing the game ball A to enter from the inflow port 5411, but one ball out of two is certain. Can enter the second passage 5502. Therefore, the inspection of the game ball distribution device 5400 is not significantly delayed.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, the game ball distribution device 5400 according to the present embodiment is provided with two means for distributing the game ball A (including a rotary distribution mechanism 5420 and a crune 5440), but is limited to this. However, it suffices as long as it is provided with at least one means for distributing the game ball A.

Further, in the game ball distribution device 5400, the configurations of the means for distributing the game balls A (rotary distribution mechanism 5420 and the crune 5440) do not necessarily have to be different from each other, and the means for distributing the game balls A have the same configuration. You may. Specifically, the game ball distribution device 5400 may include two crunes 5440 or two rotary distribution mechanisms 5420.

Further, the rotary distribution mechanism 5420 allocates the game ball A to the first passage 5501 or the second passage 5502 (two passages), but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more passages are used. The game ball A may be distributed to the aisle.

Further, the Kroon 5440 allocates the game ball A to the third passage 5503 or the fourth passage 5504 (two passages), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball is distributed to three or more passages. It may be the one that distributes A.

Further, the base member 5410 may be provided with an opening in which the game ball A can be inserted in the lower right portion of the front side surface thereof (position overlapping with the right guide path 5414 in front view). With this configuration, when inspecting the second passage 5502, the game ball A can be directly entered into the second passage 5502 from the opening. This makes it possible to efficiently inspect the first passage 5501 and the second passage 5502. In this case, the opening 5416 and the opening formed in the lower right portion of the front side surface of the base member 5410 function as an opening capable of individually flowing into the first passage 5501 and the second passage 5502. do. Further, the out port switch 5471 functions as a second detecting means capable of detecting the game ball A distributed to the second passage 5502.

Further, the opening 5416 has a shape large enough to allow the game ball A to directly enter the first starting port 5442 and the out ports 5443/5444 of the crune 5440, but the shape of the opening 5416 is limited to this. It is not something that is done. The opening 5416 may have a shape that allows the game ball A to enter the upper side surface of the crune 5440. It may be in shape. Specifically, the shape of the opening 5416 may be a substantially circular shape in front view having an inner diameter substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball A.

Further, the configuration of the out port switch 5471, the first start port switch 5472, and the out port switch 5473 is not limited to this embodiment, and the game ball A can be detected by an appropriate means.

As another embodiment of the game ball distribution device 5400, unlike the game ball distribution device 5400 described above (first embodiment), even if the positions of the first start port 5442 and the out ports 5443 and 5444 are reversed. good. By providing the inflow port of the first starting port 5442 on the back side of the crune 5440, it is possible to make it difficult to cheat from the opening 5416. Further, a passage provided with sensors (more specifically, a passage for guiding the game ball flowing into the inflow port) is provided at the back of the Kroon 5640 (that is, arranged at a position far from the opening 5416), and the sensor is provided. The passage (the passage that guides the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port) that is not provided with the kind may be arranged at a position close to the opening 5416. For example, a first start port switch is provided at the inflow port on the back side (out port 5443 according to the first embodiment), and an out port switch is provided at another inflow port on the back side (similarly, out port 5444). Do not install a sensor at the inflow port on the front side (similarly, the first starting port 5442). With this configuration, even if the opening 5416 is provided, it is possible to prevent the sensor from being fraudulent.

Further, the effect may be executed by the effect device (for example, the movable accessory unit 57) based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the out port switch 5473, and the type of the effect to be executed is determined. You may. The extraction timing of the random number for determining the effect condition, which is referred to when determining the effect type, may be the pass timing of the out port switch 5473, or the effect is executed based on the number of passes of the out port switch 5473 in a certain period. You may. Further, the holding ball display or the variable display of the decorative symbol may be performed based on the detection of the game ball by the out port switch 5471. In this case, it is just a production and has nothing to do with the profit given to the player.

The main control circuit 100 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the specific game determination means according to the present invention.
Further, the sub-control circuit 200 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the effect control means according to the present invention.
Further, the passage for guiding the game ball flowing into the out port 5443 according to the present invention is one embodiment of the first passage according to the present invention.
Further, the passage for guiding the game ball distributed to the out port 5444 according to the present invention is one embodiment of the second passage according to the present invention.
Further, the passage (third passage 5503) for guiding the game ball flowing into the first starting port 5442 according to the present invention is an embodiment of the third passage according to the present invention.
Further, the out port 5443 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the inflow port on the back side according to the present invention.
Further, the out port 5444 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of another inflow port on the back side according to the present invention.
Further, the first starting port 5442 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the inflow port on the front side according to the present invention.
Further, the first start port switch according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the specific detection means according to the present invention.
Further, the movable accessory unit 57 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the effect detecting means according to the present invention.

Next, the game ball distribution device 5600 according to another embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 135.

As shown in FIG. 135, the game ball distribution device 5600 according to another embodiment is significantly different from the game ball distribution device 5400 according to the present embodiment in that it does not include the rotary distribution mechanism 5420. In FIG. 135, the shape and orientation of each member are schematically shown in order to make it easier to see the flow of the game ball A. The game ball distribution device 5600 according to another embodiment includes an inflow port 5611, an introduction path 5612, a crune 5640, a first start port switch 5671, and a second start port switch 5672.

The inflow port 5611 is configured so that the game ball A can enter from the front.

The introduction path 5612 is formed so as to extend in the front-rear direction. The front end of the introduction path 5612 is connected to the inflow port 5611, and the game ball A entered from the inflow port 5611 can be guided in the rear direction.

The Kroon 5640 is connected to the rear end of the introduction path 5612. The game ball A guided along the introduction road 5612 enters the crune 5640. The crune 5640 includes a first starting port 5641, a second starting port 5642, an out port 5634, and the like.

The first starting port 5641 is a substantially circular hole in a plan view formed in the right front portion of the Kroon 5640. The first starting port 5641 has an inner diameter that penetrates the crune 5640 in the vertical direction and allows the game ball A to enter the ball.

The second starting port 5642 is a substantially circular hole in a plan view formed on the left side of the Kroon 5640. The second starting port 5642 is formed so as to have substantially the same shape as the first starting port 5641.

The out port 5643 is a substantially circular hole in a plan view formed in the right rear portion of the Kroon 5640. The out port 5634 is formed so as to have substantially the same shape as the first starting port 5461.

The Kroon 5640 configured in this way appropriately flips the game ball A guided from the introduction path 5612 at a protruding portion (not shown), thereby causing the game ball A to be played at the first start port 5641, the second start port 5642, or out. It can be distributed to any of the mouths 5634 (three passages).

The first start port switch 5671 is a sensor for detecting that the game ball A has entered the first start port 5641. The first start port switch 5671 is arranged in the first passage 5701, which will be described later, with its plate surface facing left and right. The first start port switch 5671 is configured to be able to detect that the game ball A has entered by the same method as the out port switch 5471 according to the present embodiment.

The second start port switch 5672 is a sensor for detecting that the game ball A has entered the second start port 5642. The second start port switch 5672 is configured in the same manner as the first start port switch 5671 except that it is arranged in the second passage 5702 described later.

The game ball distribution device 5600 configured in this way includes a first passage 5701, a second passage 5702, and a third passage 5703 as passages for guiding the game balls A distributed by the crune 5640.

The first passage 5701 is a passage for guiding the game ball A that has entered the first starting port 5461. The first passage 5701 is formed so as to extend in the left-right direction. The left end of the first passage 5701 is arranged below the first starting port 5461 and is connected to the first starting port 5461.

The second passage 5702 is a passage for guiding the game ball A that has entered the second starting port 5642. The second passage 5702 is formed so as to extend in the left-right direction. The right end of the second passage 5702 is arranged below the second starting port 5642 and is connected to the second starting port 5642.

The third passage 5703 is a passage for guiding the game ball A that has entered the out port 5634. The third passage 5703 is formed so as to extend in the front-rear direction. The front end of the third passage 5703 is arranged below the out port 5634 and is connected to the out port 5634.

The game ball distribution device 5600 according to another embodiment has openings 5616 and 5617 as openings for the game ball A to enter the first passage 5701 and the second passage 5702 at the time of inspection. Equipped.

The opening 5616 is a hole for inserting the game ball A into the first passage 5701. The opening 5616 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view. The opening 5616 is formed so as to have a size that allows the game ball A to enter the ball. The opening 5616 is formed in the middle left and right of the first passage 5701. The opening 5616 is closed by an appropriate closing means when the player plays a game.

The opening 5617 is a hole for inserting the game ball A into the second passage 5702. The opening 5617 is formed so as to have substantially the same shape as the opening 5616. The opening 5617 is formed in the middle left and right of the second passage 5702. The opening 5617 is closed by an appropriate closing means when the player plays a game.

According to the game ball distribution device 5600 according to another embodiment, the first passage 5701 can be inspected by directly entering the game ball A into the opening 5616 at the time of inspection. Further, by directly entering the game ball into the opening 5617 at the time of inspection, the inspection of the second passage 5702 can be performed. As described above, by providing the first passage 5701 and the second passage 5702 with openings 5616 and 5617 that allow the game ball A to enter separately, the first start port 5461 or the second start port 5642 can be provided. There is no need to aim and insert the game ball A. Therefore, the game ball A can be easily entered into the first passage 5701 and the second passage 5702. According to this, the inspection of the first passage 5701 and the second passage 5702 can be efficiently performed.

Here, conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a displacement member that can be displaced to a first position where the game ball can easily pass and a second position where the game ball cannot easily pass with respect to the passing region. The technique of providing the above is known. For example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-18304.

In this technique, a slide type attacker is provided as the displacement member. The sliding attacker is configured to be movable so as to project from the game board toward the player. A straight-moving solenoid is used as a drive source for moving the sliding attacker. In this way, the sliding attacker can move so as to project from the game board toward the player by using the driving force generated from the solenoid.

In the above-mentioned conventional pachinko machine, the solenoid is arranged on the back side of the sliding attacker, and the moving direction of the plunger is the same as the moving direction of the sliding attacker. With such a configuration, a large space was required in the depth direction of the pachinko machine.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of making the depth direction compact.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention
A game board 17 having a game area 20 on which the game ball rolls, and
A large winning opening 540 (passing area) provided on the game board 17 through which a game ball can pass, and
A shutter 610 (displacement member) that can be displaced to a first position where the game ball can easily pass and a second position where the game ball cannot easily pass through the large winning opening 540 (passing area).
A large winning opening solenoid 620 (driving means) for driving the shutter 610 (displacement member) and
Taxiways 430 and 530 that guide the game ball to the grand prize opening 540 (passing area),
With
The large winning opening solenoid 620 (driving means) has the shutter in a direction (horizontal direction) different from the direction (front-back direction) in which the shutter 610 (displacement member) moves from the first position to the second position. While generating a force to drive 610 (displacement member),
It is provided with a link arm 630 (driving direction changing means) that converts the direction of the force generated from the large winning opening solenoid 620 (driving means) into a direction of moving from the first position to the second position.
The large winning opening solenoid 620 (driving means) is arranged on the front side of the link arm 630 (driving direction changing means) from the rear end side of the gaming machine.

With such a configuration, the drive direction of the grand prize opening solenoid 620 is not the front-back direction in which the shutter 610 slides, but the left-right direction, and the rear end portion of the grand prize opening solenoid 620 is set from the rear end portion of the link arm 630. By arranging the solenoid unit in front, the depth of the attacker unit 500 can be narrowed. In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the depth direction can be made compact.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1,
The grand prize opening solenoid 620 (driving means) is arranged below the link arm 630 (driving direction changing means).

With such a configuration, the large winning opening solenoid 620 (driving means) and the link arm 630 (link mechanism) can have a double-decker structure. That is, the depth direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be made more compact than, for example, when the large winning opening solenoid 620 and the link arm 630 are arranged side by side in the depth direction.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is
A first taxiway 531 (second taxiway) having a taxiway 611 (bottom surface) and a front plate 520 (side wall) of the shutter 610 is provided.
The shutter 610 (displacement member) is displaced to the second position by moving from the first position toward the front plate portion 520 (side wall portion).
When the shutter 610 (displacement member) is displaced to the second position, the guide portion 611 (bottom surface portion) of the shutter 610 is formed.
When displaced to the second position, there is a gap between the guide portion 611 (bottom surface portion) and the front side plate portion 520 (side wall portion) through which the game ball cannot pass.

With such a configuration, the distance traveled when the shutter 610 opens and closes can be shortened. In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the depth direction can be made compact.

Here, conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a technique for passing a large number of game balls at a time with respect to a predetermined passing region is known. For example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-313481.

In the technique described in Patent Document 1, a game ball accommodating body capable of storing a plurality of game balls that have fallen on the game board and releasing the storage is provided. In such a configuration, when a plurality of game balls are stored in the game ball accommodating body and the storage is released, the game ball accommodating body moves the stored game balls into a predetermined passing area by the operation. It can be passed through. That is, in the technique described in Patent Document 1, many game balls can be passed through a predetermined passing region at one time.

In the above-mentioned conventional pachinko machine, since the game ball accommodating body is provided with a dedicated driving means and operated by the driving means, it has become a factor of high cost.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and provides a gaming machine capable of passing a large number of gaming balls at a time through a predetermined passing region without providing a dedicated driving means. With the goal.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention
A game board 17 having a game area 20 on which the game ball rolls, and
A large winning opening 540 (passing area) provided on the game board 17 through which a game ball can pass, and
A shutter 610 that can be displaced to an open state (first aspect) in which the game ball can easily pass through the large winning opening 540 (passing area) and a closed state (second aspect) in which the game ball cannot easily pass through. (Displacement member) and
A large winning opening solenoid 620 (driving means) for driving the shutter 610 (displacement member) and
Taxiways 430 and 530 that can guide the game ball to the grand prize opening 540 (passing area),
With
The taxiways 430 and 530
A first taxiway 531 (first taxiway) having a deceleration rib 534 (deceleration means) capable of decelerating the moving speed of the game ball, and
A second taxiway 532 (second taxiway) that guides the game ball to the upstream side of the first taxiway 531 (first taxiway), and
Includes a second taxiway 432 (third taxiway) that guides the game ball downstream of the first taxiway 531 (first taxiway).
The second taxiway 432 (third taxiway) is a game ball that has moved on the first taxiway 531 (first taxiway) and the second taxiway 432 (third taxiway). It is arranged at a position where it can collide with the moving game ball.

With such a configuration, the game balls guided through different taxiways can collide with each other in the first taxiway 531. In this way, the moving speed of the game ball guided (moved) by the first taxiway 531 can be further reduced, and it becomes easier to create a situation in which a plurality of game balls are moving on the first taxiway 531. .. That is, many game balls can be won (passed) at one time for the large winning opening 540 without providing a dedicated driving means.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1,
The second taxiway 532 (second taxiway) and the second taxiway 432 (third taxiway) are the second taxiway when the shutter 610 (displacement member) is the first aspect. The game balls that have moved on the taxiway 532 (second taxiway) and the second taxiway 432 (third taxiway) are arranged at positions where they can flow into the large winning opening 540 (passing area). It is a thing.

With such a configuration, the game balls can be guided to the first taxiway 531 (and thus the third taxiway 533) of the attacker unit 500 by two routes, so that a relatively large number of game balls can be won a large prize in a short period of time. You can make the mouth 540 win a prize. That is, the round digestion in the jackpot game can be performed quickly.

Here, conventionally, in a pachinko machine, for example, when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as the game ball passing through a start area provided in a game area where the launched game ball can roll, the display device A display control means for controlling the variable display of the symbol as the identification information on the display area and controlling the derivation and display of the symbol on which the variable display is performed is provided, and the derived and displayed symbols are a predetermined combination (specification). (Display mode), the player is provided with a device that shifts to a jackpot gaming state (so-called “big hit”) that is advantageous to the player.

Further, in a pachinko machine, a technique of stacking and arranging a plurality of movable bodies on one surface side of a base member has been proposed (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-202274). Specifically, the pachinko machine described in the document includes a movable effect device having a first movable body, a second movable body, and a third movable body arranged in front of the base member (player side). There is. The first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body are appropriately supported with respect to the base member.

However, in the conventional pachinko machine, since a plurality of movable bodies are concentrated on one surface side of the base member, the center of gravity of the entire plurality of movable bodies is far from the base member. Therefore, a large moment of inertia is generated when the plurality of movable bodies are operated. As a result, the plurality of movable bodies may swing, and the movable bodies may come into contact with each other.

Therefore, the pachinko game machine 1 (game machine) according to the present embodiment has a plate-shaped base member 1500 to which a plurality of movable bodies can be attached and a first movable body 1600 (first movable body) to be attached to one surface side of the base member 1500. (Movable body), a pair of left and right second movable bodies 1700 (second movable body) attached to the other surface side of the base member 1500, a first movable body 1600, and a pair of left and right second movable bodies 1700 are movement-controlled. The first movable body 1600 and the pair of left and right second movable bodies 1700 are provided with the movement control means 1800, and the movement control means 1800 provides an effect position that is easy for the player to see and a standby position that is difficult for the player to see. The first movable body 1600 is arranged on the player side of the base member 1500 when the movement is controlled to the effect position, and the pair of left and right second movable bodies 1700 are the effect. It is characterized in that it is arranged on the inner side of the game machine with respect to the base member 1500 when the movement is controlled to the position.

With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of contact between the movable bodies (first movable body 1600 and second movable body 1700).
That is, since the center of gravity of the entire second movable accessory unit 82 is located inside or near the base member 1500, when the movable bodies (first movable body 1600 and second movable body 1700) operate. The generated moment of inertia can be reduced, and the swing (vibration, etc.) of the movable body (first movable body 1600 and second movable body 1700) can be suppressed. Thereby, the occurrence of contact between the movable bodies (first movable body 1600 and second movable body 1700) can be suppressed.

Further, the first movable body 1600 is composed of a single movable body and is arranged in the center of the base member 1500, and the pair of left and right second movable bodies 1700 are a plurality of movable bodies (second movable body 1700). ), And are arranged as a pair of movable bodies at symmetrical positions.

With such a configuration, it is possible to more effectively suppress the occurrence of contact between the movable bodies (first movable body 1600 and second movable body 1700).
That is, in the left-right direction, the center of gravity of the entire second movable accessory unit 82 is located at the center of the left and right of the second movable accessory unit 82 or a portion close to the center of the second movable accessory unit 82. The swing (vibration, etc.) of the 1600 and the second movable body 1700) can be suppressed more effectively. Further, while the center of gravity is positioned near the center of the left and right, the first movable body 1600 arranged in the center and the second movable body 1700 arranged in pairs on the left and right can perform various effects.

Further, conventionally, in a pachinko machine, for example, when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as the game ball passing through a start area provided in a game area where the launched game ball can roll, the display device is displayed. A display control means for controlling the variable display of the symbol as the identification information on the display area of the above and controlling the derivation and display of the symbol on which the variable display is performed is provided, and the derived and displayed symbols are in a predetermined combination ( There is provided a device that shifts to a jackpot gaming state (so-called "big hit") that is advantageous to the player when a specific display mode is reached.

Further, in a pachinko machine, a technique for driving a movable body by a driving means has been proposed (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-346103). Specifically, the pachinko machine described in the document can drive a sprocket (rotating body) by a drive motor (driving means), and pay out a game ball or the like as the sprocket rotates.

The drive motor has a plurality of fixed coils. The drive motor can rotate the sprocket by sequentially passing an electric current through a plurality of coils to sequentially excite them. Further, the drive motor can keep the sprocket in a stopped state by continuously passing a current only to a predetermined phase among the plurality of coils.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional pachinko machine, it is necessary to maintain the excitation of the coil of a predetermined phase in order to hold the sprocket in a stopped state, which wastes electric power and shortens the life of the drive motor. It was disadvantageous.

Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a first movable body 1600 (movable body) whose movement is controlled to a production position that is easy for the player to see and a standby position that is difficult for the player to see. It is a pachinko game machine 1 provided with a movement control means 1800 capable of controlling the movement of the movable body 1600, and the movement control means 1800 first moves the motor 1810 (driving means) and the driving force generated by the motor 1810. A driving force transmission mechanism 1820 for transmitting to the body 1600 is provided, and the driving force transmission mechanism 1820 converts the rotational force generated by the second transmission gear 1823 (rotating body) and the second transmission gear 1823 into a linear force. A conversion mechanism (arm 1824) for conversion and a reciprocating motion transmission means (arm 1824) for transmitting a force generated by the conversion mechanism in the linear direction as a force for operating the first movable body 1600 in the vertical direction are included. The first movable body 1600 is controlled to move upward by rotating the second transmission gear 1823 in the front view clockwise direction (first direction) in the angle range Y (range of a predetermined angle), and the second transmission The gear 1823 is controlled to move downward by rotating in the front-view counterclockwise direction (second direction) in the angle range Y, and the second transmission gear 1823 rotates in the front-view clockwise direction beyond the angle range Y. By doing so, the movement is controlled downward, and when the second transmission gear 1823 rotates in the front-view clockwise direction beyond the angle range Y, the front-view clockwise beyond the angle range X (range of a specific angle). It is characterized in that a first elongated hole 1824b (movement regulating means) for restricting rotation in a direction is provided.

With such a configuration, waste of electric power can be suppressed.
That is, since the first movable body 1600 can be held at a predetermined position without supplying electric power to the motor 1810, waste of electric power can be suppressed. Further, this can prevent the life of the motor 1810 from being shortened.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is characterized in that the first movable body 1600 is moved and controlled to the standby position by the arm 1824 in a state where the rotation of the second transmission gear 1823 is restricted by the first elongated hole 1824b. Is to be.

With this configuration, the first movable body 1600 can be held in the standby position without wasting electric power.

Further, conventionally, in a pachinko machine, for example, when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as the game ball passing through a start area provided in a game area where the launched game ball can roll, the display device is displayed. A display control means for controlling the variable display of the symbol as the identification information on the display area of the above and controlling the derivation and display of the symbol on which the variable display is performed is provided, and the derived and displayed symbols are in a predetermined combination ( There is provided a device that shifts to a jackpot gaming state (so-called "big hit") that is advantageous to the player when a specific display mode is reached.

Further, in a pachinko machine, a technique of stacking and arranging a plurality of movable bodies on one surface side of a base member has been proposed (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-202274). Specifically, the pachinko machine described in the document includes a movable effect device having a first movable body, a second movable body, and a third movable body arranged in front of the base member (player side). There is. The first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body are appropriately supported with respect to the base member.

The first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body can move between the initial position (accommodation position) and the moving position (effect position), respectively. By moving the first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body from the initial position to the moving position, the decorative portion can be greatly expanded and an appropriate effect can be performed. Further, by moving the first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body from the moving position to the initial position, the decorative portion can be made difficult to see from the player.

In the above-mentioned conventional pachinko machine, when the first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body of the movable effect device are in the initial positions, the first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body are the bases. It is arranged in a laminated state on one side of the member. Therefore, when a strong impact is applied to the movable effect device, for example, when transporting the movable effect device, the movable bodies may come into contact with each other and be damaged.

Therefore, the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a plate-shaped base member 1500 to which a plurality of movable bodies can be attached and a first movable body 1600 (first movable body) attached to one surface side of the base member 1500. A second movable body 1700 (second movable body) attached to the other surface side of the base member 1500, and a movement control means 1800 for moving and controlling the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are provided. The first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 can be moved and controlled by the movement control means 1800 to an effect position that is easy for the player to see and a standby position that is difficult for the player to see. Is housed on the one side when the movement is controlled to the standby position, and the second movable body 1700 is housed on the other side when the movement is controlled to the standby position. Is.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of contact between the movable bodies.
That is, in the state where the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are housed (in the state of being in the standby position), the distance between the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of contact between the movable bodies.

Further, the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are characterized in that they are arranged at positions where they cannot come into contact with each other by the base member 1500 when the movement is controlled to the standby position.

With such a configuration, it is possible to more effectively suppress the occurrence of contact between the movable bodies.
That is, in the state where the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are housed (in the state of being in the standby position), the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are partitioned by the base member 1500. , The occurrence of contact between the movable bodies can be effectively suppressed.

Here, conventionally, in a pachinko machine, for example, when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as the game ball passing through a start area provided in a game area where the launched game ball can roll, the display device A display control means for controlling the variable display of the symbol as the identification information on the display area and controlling the derivation and display of the symbol on which the variable display is performed is provided, and the derived and displayed symbols are a predetermined combination (specification). (Display mode), the player is provided with a device that shifts to a jackpot gaming state (so-called “big hit”) that is advantageous to the player.

Further, in pachinko machines, a technique has been proposed in which a flat cable is sandwiched between wiring guides so that the flat cable cannot be easily pulled out from the connector (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-104294). Specifically, the wiring guide sandwiches the flat surface portion of the flat cable with other members. As a result, the wiring guide can regulate the movement and bending of the flat cable in the direction perpendicular to the flat surface portion, and thus the flat cable can be prevented from being easily pulled out from the connector.

However, the above-mentioned conventional pachinko machine can regulate the movement of the flat cable in the direction perpendicular to the flat surface portion, but restricts the movement of the flat cable in the direction parallel to the flat surface portion (for example, the width direction of the flat cable). It's not a thing. Therefore, the flat cable may be inserted at an angle to the connector. If the flat cable is inserted diagonally to the connector, it is disadvantageous in that problems such as short circuit and malfunction may occur.

Therefore, the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a substrate 1720 on which an LED 1721 (electronic component) is mounted, a connector 1760 provided on the substrate 1720 and connected to the LED 1721, and a flat cable 1770 connected to the connector 1760. The pachinko game machine 1 comprising the A base member 1710 (direction defining means) is provided so that when the guide portion 1714 and the flat cable 1770 come into contact with each other, the direction of guiding the flat cable 1770 is the same as the insertion direction of the connector 1760, and the flat cable is flat. The cable 1770 is characterized in that a portion inserted into the connector 1760 is provided so as to be visible from the outside.

With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects in the flat cable 1770.
That is, by guiding the flat cable 1770 in the insertion direction of the connector 1760 by the guide portion 1714, the flat cable 1770 is inserted diagonally with respect to the connector 1760, or the connector is moved as the second movable body 1700 moves. It is possible to prevent it from falling out of the 1760. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as malfunction of the LED 1721.

Further, the flat cable 1770 is characterized in that a plurality of power supply lines 1771 having different voltages are provided.

With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a short circuit in the flat cable 1770.
That is, by appropriately guiding the flat cable 1770, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a short circuit between the power supply lines 1771 having a voltage difference.

Further, conventionally, in a pachinko machine, for example, when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as the game ball passing through a start area provided in a game area where the launched game ball can roll, the display device is displayed. A display control means for controlling the variable display of the symbol as the identification information on the display area of the above and controlling the derivation and display of the symbol on which the variable display is performed is provided, and the derived and displayed symbols are in a predetermined combination ( There is provided a device that shifts to a jackpot gaming state (so-called "big hit") that is advantageous to the player when a specific display mode is reached.

Further, in pachinko machines, a technique has been proposed in which a flat cable is sandwiched between wiring guides so that the flat cable cannot be easily pulled out from the connector (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-104294). Specifically, the wiring guide sandwiches the flat surface portion of the flat cable with other members. As a result, the wiring guide can regulate the movement and bending of the flat cable in the direction perpendicular to the flat surface portion, and thus the flat cable can be prevented from being easily pulled out from the connector.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional pachinko machine, a flat cable is sandwiched by a flat portion of a wiring guide. Therefore, if a certain amount of tension is applied to the flat cable, the wiring guide may move. That is, the above-mentioned conventional pachinko machine is disadvantageous in that the holding force of the flat cable by the wiring guide may not be sufficient.

Therefore, the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a substrate 1720 on which the LED 1721 (electronic component) is mounted, a base member 1710 (first member) to which the substrate 1720 is fixed, and at least a part of the substrate 1720. In the pachinko game machine 1 provided with a cover member 1740 (second member) to cover, a connector 1760 provided on the substrate 1720 and connected to the LED 1721, and a flat cable 1770 (wiring member) connected to the connector 1760. The base member 1710 and the cover member 1740 are brought into contact with each other at a predetermined abutting portion (the convex portion 1741a of the cover member 1740 and the concave portion 1713a of the base member 1710) to enter the space formed by the base member 1710 and the cover member 1740. , The substrate 1720 and at least a part of the connector 1760 are housed, and the flat cable 1770 is arranged from the connector 1760 to the outside of the space by following a predetermined wiring path, and at a predetermined position of the wiring path, the thrust. It is characterized in that it is sandwiched between mating portions and fixed in a bent state.

With this configuration, the holding power of the flat cable 1770 can be improved.
That is, the flat cable 1770 can be firmly held by sandwiching the flat cable 1770 in a bent state. Further, it is not necessary to separately prepare a member for holding the flat cable 1770, and the flat cable 1770 can be held by using existing members (base member 1710 and cover member 1740).

Further, a recess 1713a is provided in the abutting portion of the base member 1710.
A convex portion 1741a is provided on the abutting portion of the cover member 1740.
The flat cable 1770 is characterized in that it is sandwiched and fixed between the concave portion 1713a and the convex portion 1741a.

With such a configuration, the holding power of the flat cable 1770 can be improved with a simple configuration.
That is, the flat cable 1770 can be fixed in a bent state only by sandwiching the flat cable 1770 between the concave portion 1713a and the convex portion 1741a.

Here, conventionally, a technique of a gaming machine including a rotatable circular base member and a reel seat to which a plurality of symbols are applied and can be attached to the base member is known. For example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-62151.

The gaming machine (slot machine) includes a base member (framework) in which minute protrusions are formed on the outer periphery, and a reel sheet (reel band) in which a mark is formed at one end in the length direction. The reel sheet is attached to the outer periphery of the base member using double-sided tape. At this time, the position of one end of the reel sheet in the length direction is adjusted with respect to the base member so that the mark is arranged on the side of the minute protrusion. Then, the reel sheet is gradually attached to the base member from one end in the length direction to the other end. As described above, the reel seat is attached to the base member in a state where the position in the circumferential direction with respect to the base member is determined.

However, since the reel seat is configured to be positioned on the base member only at one end in the length direction, it is difficult to position the reel seat with high accuracy. Therefore, during the mounting (or after mounting) of the reel seat, the position may shift and the mark may be realigned with the minute protrusion. At this time, since the reel sheet is peeled off from the base member and the positions of the marks are aligned again, the work of aligning the marks and attaching them to the base member becomes complicated. As described above, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the efficiency of the work of attaching the reel sheet to the base member is poor.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and the problem to be solved is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the efficiency of the work of attaching the reel seat to the base member. ..

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a pachinko gaming machine 1 including a rotatable circular base member 2421 and a reel seat 2422 that is provided with a plurality of symbols C and can be attached to the base member 2421. The reel seat 2422 is provided with a plurality of cutout portions 2422a to 2422c (position specifying means) that serve as a guide for the mounting position of the base member 2421, and the first cutout portion 2422a (first position specifying means). The distance L1a in one direction in the rotation direction of the base member 2421 from the second notch 2422b (second position specifying means) and the one from the second notch 2422b to the third notch 2422c. Is different from the distance L2a in the direction.

With this configuration, the reel seat 2422 can be accurately positioned with respect to the base member 2421. Further, it is possible to make one pattern in which the positions of all the cutouts 2422a to 2422c and all the protrusions 2421a to 2421c are aligned. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency of the work of realigning the mounting positions after mounting the reel seat 2422, and it is possible to improve the efficiency of the work of mounting the reel seat 2422 on the base member 2421.

Further, the base member 2421 is provided with a plurality of protrusions 2421a to 2421c (base member engaging portions) capable of engaging with the plurality of notch portions 2422a to 2422c, and the plurality of notch portions 2422a to 2422c are provided with the plurality of notch portions 2422a to 2422c. The reel sheet 2422 is attached to the base member 2421 by being configured to be engageable with the plurality of protrusions 2421a to 2421c and by engaging the plurality of notches 2422a to 2422c with the plurality of protrusions 2421a to 2421c. It is intended to form a displacement preventing means for positioning the base member 2421 at a specific position and preventing the reel seat 2422 from shifting in the rotation direction when the base member 2421 rotates.

With this configuration, the reel sheet 2422 can be made into a base member simply by engaging the first notch portion 2422a to the third notch portion 2422c with the first protrusion 2421a to the third protrusion 2421c. It can be easily positioned at 2421. Further, the reel seat 2422 can be held at a specific position of the base member 2421 (it is difficult to shift after positioning).
Further, since the reel seat 2422 can be reliably and integrally rotated (preventing relative rotation) when the base member 2421 is rotated, a predetermined symbol C can be reliably displayed on the player.

Here, conventionally, a technique of a gaming machine including a rotating base member and a reel seat having a plurality of symbols and attached to the base member is known. For example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-62151.

The gaming machine (slot machine) includes a base member (framework) in which minute protrusions are formed on the outer periphery, and a reel sheet (reel band) in which a mark is formed at one end in the length direction. The reel sheet is attached to the outer periphery of the base member using double-sided tape. At this time, the position of one end of the reel sheet in the length direction is adjusted with respect to the base member so that the mark is arranged on the side of the minute protrusion. Then, the reel sheet is gradually attached to the base member from one end in the length direction to the other end. As described above, the reel seat is attached to a specific position of the base member so as not to rotate relative to each other.

However, it is difficult to efficiently attach the reel sheet to the base member because it is necessary to align the mark position with the minute protrusion and then gradually attach the reel sheet to the base member. Further, when reusing the reel sheet and the base member, it is necessary to peel off the double-sided tape. As described above, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, double-sided tape is used to prevent the relative rotation of the base member and the reel sheet (preventing the reel sheet from shifting from a specific position due to the rotation of the base member). For convenience, it was difficult to improve the detachability between the base member and the reel seat.

The present invention has been made in view of the above situations, and the problem to be solved is that it is possible to prevent the reel seat from being displaced from a specific position due to the rotation of the base member, and the base member and the base member. It provides a gaming machine capable of improving the detachability with and from the reel seat.

The pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a pachinko equipped with an effect device 3400 having a rotatable circular base member 3421 and a reel sheet 3422 which is provided with a plurality of symbols C and can be attached to the base member 3421. In the game machine 1, the base member 3421 is provided with three protrusions 3421a to 3421c (base member engaging portions) that can be engaged with the reel seat 3422, and the reel seat 3422 is provided with the base. Three notches 3422a to 3422c (reel seat engaging portions) that can be engaged with the member 3421 are provided, and the three notches 3422a to 3422c and the three protrusions 3421a to 3421c are engaged with each other. A slip prevention means is formed which positions the reel sheet 3422 at a specific position of the base member 3421 and prevents the reel seat 3422 from slipping in the rotation direction when the base member 3421 rotates. Is what you do.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the reel seat 3422 from being displaced from a specific position due to the rotation of the base member 3421. Further, by engaging the three notches 3422a to 3422c with the three protrusions 3421a to 3421c, the base member 3421 and the reel seat 3422 can be attached and detached because the positioning can be performed at the same time without using double-sided tape. The sex can be improved.

Further, at least a part of the base member 3421 is formed of a transparent member, and the reel sheet 3422 is housed so that the surface of the reel sheet 3422 is in contact with the inside of the base member 3421, and is applied to the reel sheet 3422. At least a part of the symbol C is visible from the outside of the base member 3421 via the transparent member.

With this configuration, the reel sheet 3422 can be crimped to the base member 3421 by the force that the reel sheet 3422 tries to open (the force that tries to spread) due to its elasticity. This makes it easy to fix the reel sheet 3422 to the base member 3421 without using double-sided tape.

Here, conventionally, a technique of a gaming machine including a rotatable circular base member and a reel seat to which a plurality of symbols are applied and can be attached to the base member is known. For example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-62151.

The gaming machine (slot machine) includes a base member (framework) in which minute protrusions are formed on the outer periphery, and a reel sheet (reel band) in which a mark is formed at one end in the length direction. The reel sheet is attached to the outer periphery of the base member using double-sided tape. At this time, the position of one end of the reel sheet in the length direction is adjusted with respect to the base member so that the mark is arranged on the side of the minute protrusion. Then, the reel sheet is gradually attached to the base member from one end in the length direction to the other end. As described above, the reel seat is attached to the base member in a state where the position in the circumferential direction with respect to the base member is determined.

However, it is difficult to efficiently attach the reel sheet to the base member because it is necessary to align the mark position with the minute protrusion and then gradually attach the reel sheet to the base member. Further, when reusing the reel sheet and the base member, it is necessary to peel off the double-sided tape.

Therefore, it is conceivable that the reel sheet is rolled up and accommodated in the base member so that the reel sheet can be attached to the base member without using double-sided tape to improve the detachability between the base member and the reel sheet. However, in such a configuration, the end portion of the reel sheet in the circumferential direction may be deformed so as to warp inward in the radial direction of the reel sheet (see reel sheet 4422 shown in FIG. 125). As a result, a gap is created at the end of the reel sheet in the circumferential direction, which may spoil the aesthetic appearance.

As described above, in the gaming machine, it has been difficult to improve the detachability of the base member and the reel seat and to maintain the aesthetic appearance.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and the problem to be solved is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the detachability between the base member and the reel seat and maintaining the aesthetic appearance. Is what you do.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a pachinko gaming machine 1 including a rotatable circular base member 4421 and a reel sheet 4422 which is provided with a plurality of symbols C and can be attached to the base member 4421. The base member 4421 is formed of a cylindrical transparent member having a hollow inner side, and the reel sheet 4422 is housed on the inner side of the base member 4421 so that the end portion of the reel sheet 4422 partially overlaps. A pressing portion 4423c (holding member) for pressing the end portion of the reel seat 4422 is provided on the inner side of the base member 4421.

With this configuration, the reel sheet 4422 can be attached to the base member 4421 without using double-sided tape. Thereby, the detachability between the base member 4421 and the reel seat 4422 can be improved.
Further, the pressing portion 4423c can suppress the deformation of the overlapping portion 4422d to prevent the gap S (see FIG. 125 (b)) from being formed. As a result, even if the symbol C is provided with a light emitting unit 4430 (light emitting means) capable of irradiating light from the inside of the reel sheet 4422, light leaks from the end portion of the reel sheet 4422 in the circumferential direction. Can be prevented. Therefore, the aesthetic appearance can be maintained.

Further, the holding portion 4423c is composed of a member (left side mounting member 4423) different from the base member 4421.

With such a configuration, the reel seat 4422 can be easily accommodated in the base member 4421. For example, if a pressing portion is formed on the base member 4421, the left end portion of the reel sheet 4422 may be caught by the pressing portion when the reel sheet 4422 is accommodated. On the other hand, when the pressing portion 4423c is formed on the left side mounting member 4423 (a member fixed to the base member 4421 after accommodating the reel sheet 4422) as in the present embodiment, the reel sheet 4422 is used as the base member. The holding portion 4423c does not protrude from the base member 4421 when it is housed in the 4421. Therefore, the holding portion 4423c does not get in the way, and the reel seat 4422 can be easily accommodated in the base member 4421.

Here, conventionally, a technique of a game machine provided with a game ball distribution device provided with an inflow port into which a game ball can flow in is known. For example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-459.

The game ball distribution device (distribution device) includes an upper-stage crune, a lower-stage crune, a lid, and the like. The upper crune has three holes (falling area and two general areas) through which the game ball can enter, and distributes the game ball into two passages. The upper tier crune guides the game ball to the lower tier crune in one of the two passages. The lower crune has three holes (fall area, probability variation area, and general area) into which the game ball can enter, and distributes the game ball into three passages. The lid portion is formed so as to cover the upper crune and the lower crune. The lid is provided with an inflow port or the like that allows the game ball to enter the upper crune.

In such a game ball distribution device, the flow of the game ball and the operation of a sensor (a sensor for detecting that the game ball has entered the probability variation region, etc.) are generally confirmed in an inspection or the like at the time of manufacture. In the inspection, for example, the game ball is inserted from the inflow port of the lid, and the flow of the game ball guided by the upper crune is confirmed. At this time, the game ball is distributed to one of the two passages by the upper crew. Further, the game ball guided from the upper crune to the lower crune (distributed to the one passage) is distributed to one of the three passages by the lower crune.

However, in such an inspection, the game ball may not be distributed to the passage to be inspected. In this case, the game ball is repeatedly inserted until the game ball is distributed to the passage to be inspected. Further, if the game ball is easily inserted into the passage to be inspected (for example, the passage having the sensor), there is a possibility that the sensor is fraudulently performed by a fraudster. As described above, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is difficult to efficiently inspect the gaming ball sorting device.

The present invention has been made in view of the above situations, and the problem to be solved is to improve the inspection efficiency of the game ball distribution device, and after the game machine is installed in the game hall, the sensor is fraudulent. It provides a gaming machine that can be prevented from being played.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to another embodiment is
A game ball distribution device 5400 provided with an inflow port through which game balls can flow in, a detection means for detecting the passage of the game balls distributed by the game ball distribution device 5400, and the first start of the detection means. With the main control circuit 100 (specific game determination means) capable of determining whether or not to shift to a specific game that is advantageous to the player based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the mouth switch (specific detection means). It is a game machine equipped with,
The game ball distribution device 5400 has an inflow port on the back side (similarly) capable of distributing the inflowing game ball to the first passage (passage for guiding the game ball flowing into the out port 5443 according to the first embodiment). , Out port 5443) (first inflow port) and the inflowing game ball to a second passage different from the inner inflow port (similarly, a passage for guiding the game ball distributed to the out port 5444). Another separable back inlet (similarly, out port 5444) (second inlet) and the inflowing game ball are different from the back inlet and the other back inlet. The front inflow port (similarly, the first start port 5442) (third inflow port) that can be distributed to the third passage (similarly, the passage that guides the game ball that has flowed into the first start port 5442). Including
The first start port switch (specific detection means) is provided in the first passage (similarly, a passage for guiding the game ball that has flowed into the out port 5443).
An out port switch (a detection means different from the specific detection means) is provided in the second passage (similarly, a passage for guiding the game ball distributed to the out port 5444).
The detection means is not provided in the third passage (similarly, the passage that guides the game ball that has flowed into the first starting port 5442).
From the outside of the game ball distribution device 5400, the inflow port on the back side (similarly, out port 5443) (first inflow port) and the other inflow port on the back side (similarly, out port 5444) (second). 5416, and an opening 5416 capable of allowing a game ball to flow into the front inlet (also the first starting port 5442) (third inlet).
The inner inflow port (similarly, the out port 5443) (first inflow port) and the other inner inflow port (similarly, the out port 5444) (second inflow port) are the front side inflow. It is provided at a position farther from the opening 5416 than the inlet (similarly, the first starting port 5442) (third inflow port).

With such a configuration, in the game ball distribution device 5400 according to another embodiment, the inspection efficiency of the game ball distribution device 5400 is improved, and the sensor is fraudulent after the pachinko game machine 1 is installed in the game hall. Can be prevented.
More specifically, since the game ball can be put into the crune 5440 without being sorted by the rotary distribution mechanism 5420, the first passage 5501 (specifically, the first passage (first implementation)) can be efficiently entered. A passage that guides the game ball that has flowed into the out port 5443 according to the form), a second passage (similarly, a passage that guides the game ball that has been distributed to the out port 5444), and a third passage (similarly, the first start). It is possible to inspect the passage)) that guides the game ball that has flowed into the mouth 5442. Thereby, for example, the game ball distribution device 5400 can be efficiently inspected at the time of manufacturing the pachinko game machine 1.
Further, when the opening 5416 is provided, a fraudster may use a fraudulent means to insert a game ball through the opening 5416 and have a sensor detect it to obtain a prize ball or an advantageous game state. , There is a risk that the sensor itself will be modified in some way. However, as described above, the front inflow port (similarly, the first start port 5442) (third inflow port) having no sensor is the rear inflow port (similarly, the out port 5443) (the third inflow port) having the sensor. Since the inlet is located closer to the opening 5416 than the inlet (1 inlet) and the other inlet (also the out port 5444) (second inlet), the intruder has the inlet. It is difficult to cheat the sensor. In this way, after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game hall, it is possible to prevent a fraudster from committing a fraudulent act on the sensor.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is
Movable accessory unit 57 (directing device) and
A sub-control circuit 200 (effect control means) capable of controlling the movable accessory unit 57 (effect device) is provided.
An out port switch 5473 (directing detection means) is provided in the second passage (similarly, a passage for guiding the game ball distributed to the out port 5444).
The sub-control circuit 200 (effect control means) can control the movable accessory unit 57 (effect device) based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the out port switch 5473 (effect detection means). It is a thing.

With such a configuration, even if the fraudster tries to flow the game ball into the inner inflow port (also the out port 5443) (first inflow port) having the sensor, the player's benefit (specifically). Flows into the other back inlet (similarly, out port 5444) (second inlet), which is an inlet for production that has nothing to do with winning balls or obtaining a favorable gaming state. Since the situation is created, fraud can be prevented.

1 Pachinko game machine 100 Main control circuit 200 Sub control circuit 5442 First start port 5443 Out port 5444 Out port

Claims (1)

With specific members
A substrate provided on the specific member and on which electronic components are mounted, and
A connector provided on the board and connected to the electronic component,
The flat cable connected to the connector and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
A guide portion that can come into contact with a part of the flat cable is provided.
The portion where the flat cable is inserted into the connector is provided so as to be visible from the back side of the specific member.
The flat cable
A power line that can conduct power and
An insulating portion arranged so as to cover the power supply line and
A reinforcing sheet capable of reinforcing at least a part of the insulating portion is provided.
The guide can regulate the movement of the flat cable in a predetermined direction.
The board is provided with a reference portion that is substantially parallel to a predetermined portion of the flat cable when the flat cable is accurately connected to the connector.
The reference portion is printed on the substrate so as to be larger than the predetermined portion in a predetermined direction.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images